Home

ZyXEL ES-3124 User's Manual

1. IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER SA UE BU IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 104 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 326 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 3124 User s Guide The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 105 Eight Subnets SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS pra r 1 30 31 B F 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 2 i S 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 The following table is a summary for class C subnet planning Table 106 Class C Subnet Planning ree ni HORE SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS pa esl PER 1 255 255 2
2. COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE multicast limit Enables the interface multicast 13 limit lt pkt s gt Sets how many multicast packets 13 the interface receives per second dlf limit Enables the Destination Lookup 13 Failure DLF limit lt pkt s gt Sets the interface DLF limit in 13 packets per second pps diffserv Enables DiffServ on the port s 13 gos priority SQ ag Mos Sets the quality of service priority 13 for an interface mirror Enables port mirroring in the 13 interface dir Enables port mirroring for 13 ingress egress incoming outgoing or both both gt incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis speed duplex lt auto 10 Sets the duplex mode half or 13 half 10 full and speed 10 100 or full 100 1000 Mbps of the connection on half 100 the interface Selecting auto full 1000 full gt auto negotiation makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support bpdu control Sets how Bridge Protocol Data 13 lt peer tunnel di Units BPDUs are used in STP scard network gt port states no egress set Disables the outgoing traffic port 13 lt port list gt list for a port based VLAN protocol based Disables protocol based VLAN of 13 vlan ethernet the specifed protocol on the port type ethernet type igmp immediate Disa
3. COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE cluster member lt mac address gt Removes the cluster member 13 mvr lt vlan id gt Disables MVR on the switch 13 fe spq Disables Strict Priority Queuing 13 on the switch syslog Disables syslog logging 13 server ip Disables syslog logging to the 13 address specified syslog server server ip Enables syslog logging to the 13 address specified syslog server inactive type type Disables syslog logging for the 13 specified log type sys link config error or report vlan 1 409894 Enters the VLAN configuration 13 mode See Section 34 11 5 on page 263 for more information vlan type lt 802 1q port Specifies the VLAN type 13 based gt igmp Enables IGMP snooping 13 snooping host timeout lt 1 16711450 gt Sets the host timeout value 13 leave timeout lt 1 16711450 gt Sets the leave timeout value 13 unknown Sets how to treat traffic from 13 multicast frame unknown multicast group lt drop flooding gt reserved Sets how to treat traffic belonging 13 multicast group to reserved multicast groups drop flooding igmp Enables IGMP filtering on the 13 filtering switch profile name Sets the range of multicast 13 start address address es in a profile ip end address ip interface port channel Enables a port or a list of ports for 13 lt port list gt configuration See Section 34 11 4 on page 259 for more details Spq Sets the queuing method to S
4. OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION SNMPv2 Traps Cold Start 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the switch is turned on WarmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the switch restarts linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non authenticated hosts RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes topology change 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes Chapter 27 Access Control 201 ES 3124 User s Guide 27 3 3 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen Figure 92 Access Control SNMP a xi m Access Control Get Community Set Community Trap Community Trap Destination Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Access Control SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Enter the get community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Enter the set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trap Communi
5. LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX Amber On The Ethernet port is negotiating in full duplex mode Off The Ethernet port is negotiating in half duplex mode and no collisions are occurring Gigabit Port LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX Amber On The Gigabit port is negotiating in full duplex mode Off The Gigabit port is negotiating in half duplex mode and no collisions are occurring GBIC Slots LNK Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port ACT Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data MGMT 10 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 10 Mbps Off The port is not connected at 10 Mbps or to an Ethernet device 100 Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receivi
6. a Active rH e Active Commit Rate ape Peak Rate dalia LE rH Kbps a Kbps a Kbps 1 n ft kops r fs kbps r f k 2 CI fi Kbps O f Kbps O fi Kbps 3 fi Kbps Lun fi Kbps CI fi Kbps 4 ri fi Kbps C f Kbps Ei fi Kbps 5 D E Kbps DH B Kbps O H Kbps 6 O E 1 Kbps O p Kbps a H Kbps 7 rH fi Kbps Li f Kbps ri fi Kbps 8 O fi Kbps C E Kbps O D Kbps 9 O E Kbps Ci ho Kbps ri is Kbps 10 O m Kbps O hh Kbps O hi Kbps 11 O ops m fs bps m fi kbps 12 ri fi Kbps ri fi Kbps ri fi Kbps 13 C fi Kbps O hi Kbps C Bn o 1 Kbps 14 r B Kbps O fi Kbps rH D Kbps 15 r hn Kbps a i Kbps m hh Kbps 16 Li fi Kbps fi Kbps n fi Kbps 17 O fi Kbps Ci n Kbps ri n Kbps 18 O mi Kbps O ih Kbps O Do Kbps 19 ri H Kbps O fi Kbps ho 1 Kbps 20 m fi Kbps C f Kbps E fi Kbps 21 ri fi Kbps O i Kbps ri i Kbps 22 O fi Kbps rH BR Kbps Ci D Kbps 23 OD H Kbps O hi Kbps E ci Kbps 24 E B Kbps C hh Kbps a hi Kbps 25 O fi Kbps Ci fi Kbps Ci fi Kbps 26 O fi Kbps m hi Kbps O fi Kbps 27 O fi Kbps O n Kbps C E Kbps 28 E fi Kbps ri f Kbps ri fi Kbps Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 29 Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the switch Port This field displays the port number 120 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control ES 3124 User s Guide Table 29 Bandwidth Contro
7. 114 11 6 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status _ 117 Chapter 12 BaHgwIdIn E ONO usa dra 119 121 Bandwidih Control DVOFVIBW lechat 119 128 1 4 A vrai edad dafor cro a 119 12 2 BSnamdat Control Setup ciccia et 119 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm A A 123 1341 Broadcast Storm Control SS scri 123 Chapter 14 PAM a dla iaa 127 14 1 Port INFORO SUE sti tr le 127 Chapter 15 LIE ARA Nado 131 15 1 Link Aggregation OVOVIGM cir aii A 131 Te Dynamic Link AGE GIRO iaa RA 131 1921 Unk Agar gato n EE sor 132 15 9 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status iii a 132 15 4 Link Aggregation Setup onicicniininninninicanriccacarrr rs 133 Chapter 16 E AA e aa aiei 137 16 1 Port Authentication OVEMeW cain 137 UNE IE WEE 137 165 1 1 1 Vendor Specific ANDU licia 137 16 1 1 2 Tunnel Protocol PUNE sici n sisas iran 138 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration cri io iii 138 16 2 1 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings 139 16 2 2 Activate IEEE BUS TX DOOUMIDE sella EROR d cad 140 Table of Contents ES 3124 User s Guide Chapter 17 PORGE iaia r 143 TADOU TG SOOO sinari 143 17 2 POR SEGUI SQUAD criniera alcalini girata 143 Chapter 18 CSS clara 147 18 1 About the Classifier and QOS Luci ei zioni il 147 18 2 Canfiguring the Classillet rr Rae 147 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration eese 150 194 Uan dem 151 Chapter 19 Pila 153 19 1 Policy Rule
8. 188 Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 59 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION DSCP Setting Click DSCP Map to open the screen where you can set up the mapping between source DSCP priority and IEEE 802 1p priority Active This field allows you to activate deactivate DiffServ on the switch Port This read only index number indicates which port you are activating Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active This allows you to activate DiffServ on a per port basis Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 25 3 Configure DSCP Setting Use this screen to convert DSCP priority to IEEE 802 1p priority Click IP Application DiffServ DSCP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point 189 ES 3124 User
9. Syntax bandwidth limit bandwidth limit pir lt Kbps gt bandwidth limit cir lt Kbps gt bandwidth limit egress lt Kbps gt where pir lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic cir lt Kbps gt Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic egress Kbps Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic egress on the switch An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Enable bandwidth control e Set the outgoing traffic bandwidth limit to 5000Kbps Set the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 4000Kbps Set the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 8000Kbps ras config interface port channel 1 ras config interface bandwidth limit ras config interface bandwidth limit egress 5000 ras config interface bandwidth limit cir 4000 bandwidth limit pir 8000 ras config interface 37 2 5 mirror The mirror command enables port mirroring on the interface Syntax mirror mirror dir ingress egress both where dir Enables port mirroring for incoming outgoing or both ingress egress both incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis An example is shown next Chapter 37 Interface Commands 291 ES 3124 User s Guide Enable port mirroring Enable the monitor port 3 Enable ports 1 4 5 an
10. Type configin enable mode ras config Command modes that follow are sub modes of the config mode and can only be accessed from within the config mode Config vlan This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure VLAN settings Type vlan followed by a number between 1 to 4094 For example vlan 10 to configure settings for VLAN 10 ras config vlan Config interface This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure port related settings Type interface port channel followed by a port number For example interface port channel 10 to configure port 10 on the switch ras config interface Config mvr This is a sub mode of the config mode and allows you to configure multicast VLAN settings To enter MVR mode enter mvr followed by a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 For example enter mvr 2 to configure multicast settings on VLAN 2 ras config mvr Enter exit to quit from the current mode or enter logout to exit the command interpreter 34 8 Getting Help The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the commands List of available commands under a command group Detailed descriptions of the commands Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 237 ES 3124 User s Guide 34 8 1 List of Available Commands Enter help to display a list of available commands and the co
11. 1024 ssh Service rsa ssh dsa gt lt key gt https cert Re generates a certificate 13 regeneration rsa dsa timeout 0 Sets the HTTPS timeout period 13 65535 multi Enables multi login 14 login mvr vlan Enters the MVR Multicast VLAN 13 id gt Registration configuration mode See Section 34 11 6 on page 264 for more information dhcp relay Enables DHCP relay 13 helper address Sets the IP addresses of up to 3 13 svr ip DHCP servers svr2 ip svr3 ip 258 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE option Allows the switch to add DHCP 13 relay agent information information Allows the switch to add system 13 name to agent information diffserv Enables DiffServ on the switch 13 dscp 0 63 priority 0 7 Maps DSCP value with an 802 1p 13 value 34 11 4 interface port channel Commands The following table lists the interface port channel commands in configuration mode Use these commands to configure the ports Table 85 interface port channel Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE interface Enables a port or a list of ports for 13 port configuration channel port list weight lt wt1 gt Sets the interface to use WFQ 13 wt2 wt8 weighting A weight value of one to eight is
12. 165 TES S0 02 TO FAME T asia 165 doble 91 LAN SUCKING liceale 167 Table 52 Multicast Satus em 170 Table 59 Multicast Soligo ia 172 Table 54 Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile aa 174 EA AA TOT 178 Table 56 MYR Group CODQUEBOFP scsi iaia 179 Table 57 DHCP roe 184 Table So SQUE RORO Lisiera 185 Wale SAO RUDO aan 189 Table GO Statie AQUINO asisto ile 190 TS cO UU UU TT 191 Table 82 Filename GConmventlolts ueno 195 Table 62 Access Control Overview as 199 Table 64 SNMP Commands ucraina En phe d d nei ht 200 Table 65 SNMP WRAPS C re 201 Table 65 Access Control SNMP iii A 202 Table 67 Access Control Logs anna 203 Table 68 Access Control Service Access Control i 211 Table 69 Access Control Remote Management sss 212 Toe Dado cT 213 Table 71 Syslog Severity Levels cosi ARA 215 TAS PESO I NE I TO A TEAS SER A A sass E REM 216 Table 73 Syslog Server SOU secc reise pet che dite ttd dictu dedere dnt per ad drb paul qua 217 Table 74 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications neee 219 Tabla 75 Cluster Management Status iaia 221 Table 76 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example sss 223 Table 77 Clustering Management Configuration 224 Eo TS MAC TBE ee RR ante 228 Table FI ARP He lilla 230 Table 80 Configure COME ii aa i ia 232 Table 81 Command Interpreter Mode Summary ui 236 26 List of Tables ES 3124 User s Guide Table 82 Com
13. Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Chapter 22 Multicast ES 3124 User s Guide 22 7 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to
14. Table 28 Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to configure MRSTP settings Refer to Section 11 3 on page 110 Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 117 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 28 Spanning Tree Protocol Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanni
15. 44 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Panel Connections The figure below shows the front panel of the switch Figure 9 Front Panel RJ 45 Gigabit Ports for Stacking Console Port 2 a a 6 9013 50 56 30 30 22 te a ey x 4 z z L 20 a 24 2 of ERI Jo p jw aw wg bz 3g 3p RA E LE NIE LU panne SECO DoS ck ROERO DI LEDs 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Management Port RJ 45 Gigabit Mini GBIC Dual Personality Interfaces The following table describes the ports on the panels Table 1 Panel Connections CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION 24 10 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Ports 2 100 1000 Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet Mbps RJ 45 Switches or use them to daisy chain other switches Gigabit Ports Two Dual Each interface has one 1000 Base T copper RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable SFP fiber port with one port active at a time Interfaces 2100 1000 Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet Mbps RJ 45 switches Gigabit Ports Mini GBIC Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optic connections to backbone
16. IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields In band IP You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the switch Addresses from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s You must configure a VLAN first IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below 80 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3124 User s Guide Table 11 IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Mask VID Type the VLAN group identification number Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Gateway Manageable Select this option to allow the switch to be managed using this specified IP address Add Click Add to save the new rule to the switch s run time memory It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the scre
17. RECOMMENDED VALUE S CEA EDS ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1t05 1 to 65535 On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUS periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiate
18. Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay Timer connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 142 Chapter 16 Port Authentication ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 17 Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch The switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application Port Securit
19. https gt classifier lt name gt Disables the classifier Each 13 classifier has one rule If you disable a classifier you cannot use policy rule related information lt name gt Enables a classifier 13 inactive policy lt name gt Deletes the policy A policy sets 13 actions for classifier traffic lt name gt Enables a policy 13 inactive vlan lt vlan id gt Deletes the static VLAN entry 13 dhcp relay Disables DHCP relay 13 option Disables the relay agent 13 information option 82 information System name is not appended to 13 option 82 information field vlan stacking Disables VLAN stacking on the 13 switch ssh key Disables the secure shell server 13 rsal rsa dsa encryption key Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts Removes all remote hosts 13 known hosts Removes the specified remote 13 lt host ip gt host from the list of all known hosts known hosts Removes remote known hosts 13 lt host ip gt with the specified public key 1024 ssh 1024 bit RSA1 RSA or DSA rsa ssh dsa https timeout Resets the session timeout to the 13 default of 300 seconds multi login Disables another administrator 14 from logging into Telnet cluster Disables cluster management on 13 the switch Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 249 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued
20. queue prio replace tos gt diffserv action lt diff set tos diff replace priority diff set dscp gt outgoing mirror outgoing eport outgoing non unicast eport outgoing set vlan metering out of profile action lt change dscp drop forward set drop prec gt inactive gt Configures a policy A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 13 radius server host lt index gt lt ip gt Specifies the IP address of RADIUS server 1 or RADIUS server 2 index 1 or index 2 auth port socket number gt key lt key string gt Sets the port number and key of the external RADIUS server 254 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE timeout lt 1 1000 gt Specifes the RADIUS server 13 timeout value mode lt priority roun Specifies the mode for RADIUS 13 d robin gt server selection port Enables 802 1x authentication on 13 access the switch authentica tor lt port list gt Enables 802 1x authentication on 13 the specified port s reauthenticate Sets a subscriber to periodically 13 re enter his
21. Displays all port authentication 13 authenticator settings lt port list gt Displays port authentication 13 settings on the specified port s port security Displays all port security settings 13 lt port list gt Displays port security settings on 13 the specified port s snmp server Displays SNMP settings 13 logins Displays login account information 13 service control Displays service control settings 13 remote Displays all secured client 13 management information index Displays the specified secured 13 client information 242 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 83 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE classifier Displays all classifier related 13 information name Displays the specified classifier 13 related information policy Displays all policy related 13 information name Displays the specified policy 13 related information interface port Displays current interface status 13 list interfaces Displays current interface 13 config lt port configuration on the port s list bandwidth Displays bandwidth control 13 control settings on the port s egress Displays outgoing port information 13 on the port s bstorm control Displays broadcast storm control 13 settings on the port s igmp immediate Displays IGMP immediate leave 13 leave
22. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the switch as a DHCP client to obtain TCP IP information such as the IP address and subnet mask from a DHCP server If you disable the DHCP service you must manually enter the TCP IP information VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 31 ES 3124 User s Guide Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there 1s network congestion Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Schedule WFS This allows the switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the switch how to forward I
23. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next two fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth
24. Enter Debug Mode ES 3124 gt atle Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 262144 bytes received Erasing OK ES 3124 atgo The switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 2 Reset to the Factory Defaults To reset the switch back to the factory defaults do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See the chapter on hardware connections for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 59 ES 3124 User s Guide 4 Type atbr after the Enter Debug Mode message Figure 20 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V0 6 03 06 2006 09 21 13 RAM Size 32 Mbytes DRAM POST Testing 32768K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH Intel 32M ZyNOS Version 3 70 AID 0 b0 4 28 2006 17 27 36 Enter Debug Mode ES 3124 atbr Restore default tes ES 3124 atgo 5 After the resetting type atgo to restart the switch 4 8 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you
25. Hex Port Role SPVID Priority 5 d 0 1 Access Pon y ho ox 2 Access Port y B ox 3 Access Port bh ox 4 Access Port z ox 5 Access Port y NEN ox 6 Access Port y lr ox 7 Access Port y NEN ox 8 Access Port Bo ox 9 Access Port y NN o 10 Access Pon il E am o 2 T Access Port il o s 12 Access Port ill E o s 13 Access Port fll o s 14 Access Port ial p o s 15 Access Por i a o s 16 Access Port ll o s 17 Access Port i e o s 18 Access Port ej e oa 19 Access Port y UNE o 20 Access Port ill i oa 2 Access Port fll o s 22 Access Port e oa 23 Access Port fad NN o s 24 Access Port ill i fox 25 Access Pon iad o s 26 Access Port y lr o 27 Access Port gad ii oa 28 Access Port BI pam oa Apply Cancel 166 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the switch SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop down list box or select Others and then enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to OxFFFF Ox denotes a hexadecimal number It does not have to be typed in the Others text
26. Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 7 Basic Setting TI ES 3124 User s Guide 7 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add switch IP address 7 6 1 Management IP Addresses The switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s Note You must configure a VLAN first 78 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 30 IP Setup Domain Name Server Default Management 0 0 0 0 in band Outofband In band Management IP Address Out of band Management IP Address C DHCP Client Static IP Addr
27. O Java console enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart 30 Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Fa b Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 40 3 Problems with the Password Table 90 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot access the The password field is case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct switch password using the proper casing The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 315 ES 3124 User s Guide 316 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting ES 3124 User s Guide APPENDIX A Product Specifications These are the switch product specifications Table 91 General Product Specifications Ethernet 24 10 100 Base TX interfaces Interface Auto negotiation Auto MDI MDIX Compliant with IEEE 802 3 3u Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control
28. Peer X Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION 5 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Port This is the port index number 82 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3124 User s Guide Table 12 Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port Type This field displays 10 100M for an Ethernet Fast Ethernet connection and 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex for Gigabit ports only Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine
29. See Section 8 1 on page 85 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 34 VLAN VLAN Status D VLAN Status g VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time Status a 1 0 00 12 Static 2 111 0 00 12 Static Change Pages Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of This is the number of VLANs configured on the switch VLAN Index This is the VLAN index number Click on this to view port settings for the specified VLAN 88 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide Table 14 VLAN VLAN Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added using Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 8 5 2 Static VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Sec
30. These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 8 VLAN 101 ES 3124 User s Guide 102 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Static MAC Forwarding Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 9 1 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the switch See Chapter 17 on page 143 for more information on port security C
31. This chapter discusses the Mirror setup screens 14 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Chapter 14 Mirroring 127 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 53 Mirroring Active O Monitor Port Port Mirrored Direction n Ingress y 1 C Ingress x 2 Ingress y 3 C Ingress y 4 D Ingress y 5 m Ingress y 6 m Ingress x 7 m Ingress 8 m Ingress y 9 C Ingress y 10 Ingress y 11 Ingress y 12 Ingress y 13 D Ingress 14 m Ingress x 15 m Ingress 16 D ingress y 17 a ingress y 18 Ingress 19 m Ingress 20 Ingress 21 Ingress y 22 D ingress 23 m Ingress y 24 Ingress 25 Ingress y 26 n ingress 27 D Ingress 28 m Ingress Apply Cancel 128 Chapter 14 Mirroring ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you cop
32. e Seat z E save your changes back to the 5 n h H a s m run time memory Settings in m E oz Ba the run time memory are lost a BD p o ars r when the ES 3124 s power is turned off 12 r hn n All y r 13 r ft AII y n 14 n nh D All 7 r 15 O hb n All y r 16 r h n All y r 17 n H All y D 18 r n iH All y n 19 D hn o All r 20 r hl 1 o All x r 2 r hn o All x r 22 r h nmn All r 23 n hb o All y n 24 r n n All r 25 r fi J n All x r 26 r bo o All 7 Dn 27 r fo B AII y r 28 r fi n All y D Apply Cancel Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 63 ES 3124 User s Guide 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address The default management IP address of the switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example Fi gure 24 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address N AI O 1 LI 1 L 1 1 1 1 e 1 Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the switch Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the switch 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 51 for more information 3 Click Basic Setting and IP Setup in the navigation panel 4 Configure the related fiel
33. history Displays a list of previous 13 command s that you have executed exit Exits from Config mode into 13 Enable mode mode zynos Changes the CLI mode to the 13 ZyNOS format password lt password gt Change the password for 14 accessing Enable mode 246 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE no ip Sets the management IP address 13 to the default value route ip Removes a specified IP static 13 mask route route ip Enables a specified IP static 13 mask route inactive igmp filtering Clears the IGMP filtering settings 13 on the switch profile name Deletes the IGMP filtering profile 13 profile name Deletes a rule in the IGMP 13 start address filtering profile ip end address ip igmp snooping Disables IGMP snooping 13 mac forward mac mac addr Removes the specified MAC 13 vlan vlan id forwarding entry belonging to a interface VLAN group if any forwarded interface id through an interface s mac lt mac addr gt Enables the specified MAC 13 vlan vlan id address belonging to a VLAN interface group if any forwarded through lt interface id gt AN interface s inactive mac filter mac lt mac addr gt Enables the specified MAC filter 13 vlan vlan id rule inactive
34. lacp no trunk lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt interface lt port list gt where lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt Disables the trunk group lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt Disables LACP in the trunk group lacp lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt Removes ports from the trunk group interface lt port list gt An example is shown next Disable trunk one T1 Disable LAPC on trunk three T3 Remove ports one three four and five from trunk two T2 ras config no trunk T1 ras config no trunk T3 lacp ras config no trunk T2 interface 1 3 5 280 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide 36 4 4 2 no port access authenticator Syntax no port access authenticator no port access authenticator lt port list gt reauthenticate no port access authenticator lt port list gt where Disables port authentication on the switch lt port list gt Disables the re authentication mechanism on the listed port s reauthenticate lt port list gt Disables authentication on the listed ports An example is shown next Disable authentication on the switch Disable re authentication on ports one three four and five Disable authentication on ports one six and seven Figure 116 no port access authenticator Command Example ras config no port access authenticator ras config no port access authenticator 1 3 5 reauthenticate ras config no port access authenticator
35. port 65 port details 67 STP 113 117 VLAN 88 status lights 49 status screen 52 STP 107 bridge ID 113 117 bridge priority 112 116 configuration 110 114 designated bridge 108 forwarding delay 112 116 Hello BPDU 108 Hello Time 112 113 116 117 how it works 108 Max Age 112 114 116 118 Index 333 ES 3124 User s Guide path cost 107 112 116 port priority 112 116 port state 108 root port 108 status 113 117 terminology 107 STP Spanning Tree Protocol 32 subnet 321 subnet mask 323 subnetting 323 switch lockout 57 switch reset 58 switch setup 76 Sys commands examples 267 279 Sys log disp 279 Sys sw mac list 269 Syslog 215 protocol 215 server setup 216 settings 215 setup 215 severity levels 215 system information 71 system log 213 system login 51 System reboot 193 T tagged VLAN 85 Telnet commands 234 logging in 234 management 234 time current 75 time server 75 time zone 75 Time RFC 868 75 time server 75 time service protocol 75 time format 75 time zone 75 trademarks 1 transceiver installation 47 removal 48 traps destination 202 traps SNMP 201 trunk group 131 trunking 32 131 tunnel protocol attribute 138 U UTC Universal Time Coordinated 75 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation 41 ventilation holes hardware 41 VID 85 89 165 number of possible VIDs 85 priority frame 85 VID VLAN Identifier 85 VLAN 75 85 acceptable frame type 94
36. 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 7 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 j 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 pot AE Doarme Copyright 1995 2005 by ZyXEL Communicatir s ut Xu A fe DI 27 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen 210 Chapter 27 Access Control ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 102 Access Control Service Access Control A Service Access Control Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet Iv 3 SSH e 2 FTP Iv fr HTTP e o B Minutes HTTPS Iv 443 ICMP lv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 68 Access Control Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that y
37. 1 Management IP Addresses sli 78 ES PORE RUUD sori lai i 81 Chapter 8 VEAN PRE ee ee 9 85 92 1 Introduction te IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN sella 85 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames ses 85 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration Lari ka atur k abor Dr cada 86 UNE GARP a AA 86 22 1 DARE TIAS Lai 86 Ga D URP ti 86 Go Port VLAN Trufikiig cnc 87 04 Soloct the VLAN NITET 87 RS E 88 B5 T5586 VLAN SIUS iii 88 33 2 ote VLAN Detalls E 89 5 5 3 Configure a Salle VLAN sesos eese tectt aenneren iina 90 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings siae ai 92 5 8 Protocol Based VLANS ii 95 8 7 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN siete ri ie ciii cet oue ris 95 8 8 Create an IP based VLAN Example ens 97 8 9 Portbased VLAN SUD Lai 98 8 9 1 Configure a Portbiased VLAN it 98 Chapter 9 matie MAC Forward in iii dadas 103 9 1 Configuring Static MAG Forwarding scrl 103 Chapter 10 Filigrana 105 TOA Configure a Filtering RUE scala 105 Chapter 11 Spanning Ires PEDIGCOL cca 107 WWW STRRSIE SAS ellerre TUN 107 Table of Contents 11 ES 3124 User s Guide VISTO TODOS iii 107 WIDE et ide a aaa 108 Vite STP Poin Cites Liana 108 TELA Matiple RSTP calli iii 109 11 2 Spanning Tres Protocol Main Screen cria adas 109 11 3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Lorin 110 11 4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status 113 11 5 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol _
38. 121 ES 3124 User s Guide 122 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 13 Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control 123 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 52 Broadcast Storm Control Active Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s Broadcast pkts Port LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL LLL LLLLLLLL DES apa mpe m mE Ea al mE m Ea meS D ES mE a al ee m Ea ee 0s 0 0 0 0 00 05 p LLL GO 0 OO Or DiGi Or Oi OO Orb 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 0 0 00 00 0 LLVILLLLKL LULLLLKLLLU LLLLL 0000500050000 OD ui stiati 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel SK wi m ii OR DO MW DO HF NM x D O mr o FPP OU oO 7 00 Orie POrOieiecieiciecieiriericice ANI NE NEN NEN 0L ON Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Contr
39. 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds the Leave Timer to 800 milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds ras config f garp join 300 leave 800 leaveall 11000 38 2 3 GVRP Timer Syntax show vlanlq gvrp This command shows the switch s GVRP settings An example is shown next ras show vlanlq gvrp GVRP Support gvrpEnable YES ras 38 2 4 Enable GVRP Syntax vlanlq gvrp This command turns on GVRP in order to propagate VLAN information beyond the switch 38 2 5 Disable GVRP Syntax no vlanlg gvrp This command turns off GVRP so that the switch does not propagate VLAN information to other switches 38 3 Port VLAN Commands You must configure the switch port VLAN settings in config interface mode Chapter 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 299 ES 3124 User s Guide 38 3 1 Set Port VID Syntax pvid VID where VID Specifies the VLAN number between 1 and 4094 This command sets the default VLAN ID on the port s The following example sets the default VID to 200 on ports 1 to 5 ras config interface port channel 1
40. 240 forwarding process example 301 getting help 237 logging in 234 modes 236 modes summary 236 mvr mode details 264 Index 329 ES 3124 User s Guide static VLAN table example 301 summary 240 syntax conventions 234 user mode details 240 using history 239 vlan mode details 263 commands interface mode details 259 configuration change running config 193 saving 239 configuration file 58 239 and commands 239 backup 194 restore 58 194 configuration saving 57 connections hardware 45 Console port 35 console port commands 233 settings 46 233 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 1 CPU management port 98 CRC Cyclic Redundant Check 69 current date 75 current time 75 D DHCP 31 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 31 DHCP relay 183 DHCP relay agent information 183 diagnostics 213 Ethernet port test 213 ping 213 system log 213 DiffServ Code Point See DSCP disclaimer 1 Double tagged Frames 33 163 DSCP and IEEE 802 1p values 187 configuration 189 mapping priority 189 packet priority 187 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 187 dual personality interfaces 45 dynamic link aggregation 131 E egress port 101 Ethernet broadcast address 229 Ethernet port test 213 Ethernet ports 46 default settings 46 extended authentication protocol 137 external authentication server 137 F FCC interference statement 2 file transfer using FTP command example 196 filename conventi
41. 3124 User s Guide Note When you use the write memory command without specifying a configuration file index number the switch saves the changes to the configuration file the switch is currently using 35 6 2 Resetting to the Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults 1 Enter erase running config to reset the current running configuration 2 Enter write memory to save the changes to the current configuration file If you want to reset the second configuration file use the write memory command again with the specified index number The following example resets both configuration files to the factory default settings rast erase running config rast write memory rast write memory 2 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands 273 ES 3124 User s Guide 274 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 36 Configuration Mode Commands This chapter describes how to enable and configure your switch s features using commands For more background information see the feature specific chapters which proceed the commands chapters 36 1 Enabling IGMP Snooping To enable IGMP snooping on the switch Enter igmp snooping and press ENTER You can also set how to treat traffic from an unknown multicast group by typing the unknown multicast frame parameter Syntax igmp snooping igmp snooping igmp snooping igmp snooping igmp snoopin
42. Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after yo
43. Cc Cc a o Xx Setting Wizard Incoming e a 10 11 1 13 M 15 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 e a T m e e 9e 8 2 3 2 3 8S 8 S S BIRIRIBIR gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt gt ER gt SEDE gt gt gt LES gt gt gt e ER JE BIBIBIRIR gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt El JA eee 2 2 sap L gt e e e SS BB eee e Eee gt e e e Eee gt gt e gt BIB pece e Cee ee e e SAS Bib El bik p iv iv iv iv iv iv iv cru AS AAA ASS ASAS AAA ASS 5 EDENE gt gt gt EDERE gt gt gt e BEREE gt CERRO gt gt gt gt ORDER e ee o DORE gt BIBIBIBIR gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt gt REE gt gt gt RIBIBIRIR gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIR gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt EJEJEIB E gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt AS SAA SS BiB gt e e e Eee gt e e ASAS pp e AS BRI b e e e Bib gt e e e AS SS bibl pb e e ASAS SOS Bei DADNE gt gt gt BEREBER gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt e RIBIBIRIR gt gt gt gt gt 355 gt gt gt BRRR gt gt gt blblblblbl gt gt gt gt BIRIRIBIB gt gt gt gt blblblblblo gt gt DEERE gt gt gt gt REEERE gt e gt Rebbe gt gt vw MEMM 10 1 12 13 M 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 PAHA EIFIFIFIEI 3 2
44. Command Line Interface Initializing Web Interface Press ENTER to continue Use the following steps to telnet into your switch 1 For local management connect your computer to the RJ 45 management port labeled MGMT on the switch 2 Make sure your computer IP address and the switch IP address are on the same subnet In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 0 1 the default management IP address and click OK 3 A login screen displays refer to Section 34 3 on page 234 34 3 The Login Screen After you have successfully established a connection to the switch using a direct console connection or Telnet a login screen displays as shown below For your first login enter the default administrator login username admin and password 1234 Enter User Name admin Enter Password XXXX 34 4 Command Syntax Conventions The rules of the commands are listed next The command keywords are in courier new font The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt for instance ping ip means that you must specify an IP number for this command e The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets for instance configure snmp server contact system contact location system location gt 234 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide means that the con
45. Commands 267 ES 3124 User s Guide 35 2 2 show ip Syntax show ip This command displays the IP related information such as IP address and subnet mask on all switch interfaces The following figure shows the default interface settings ras show ip Out of band Management IP Address 192 168 0 1 Management IP Address IP 192 168 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID O IP Interface IP 192 168 1 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 1 ras 35 2 3 show logging Syntax show logging This command displays the system logs The following figure shows an example rast show logging 1 Thu Jan 1 00 02 08 1970 PPO5 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 2 Thu Jan 1 00 03 14 1970 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 3 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PPOf WARN SNMP TRAP 26 Event On Trap 4 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PINI WARN SNMP TRAP 1 warm start 5 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 6 Thu Jan 00 03 16 1970 PINI INFO main init completed 7 Thu Jan 1 00 00 13 1970 PP26 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 8 Thu Jan 1 00 00 14 1970 PPOf WAR SNMP TRAP 26 Event On Trap 9 Thu Jan 00 00 14 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 0 cold start 10 Thu Jan 00 00 14 1970 PINI INFO main init completed 11 Thu Jan 00 00 04 1970 PPO5 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 11 Thu Jan 1 00 00 04 1970 PPO5 WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up Clear Error Log y n Note If you clear a log by entering y atthe cle
46. EE EA 206 27 OATIPS ESSI viii lara 207 27 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ccooncicccnnnoniicninnnanacccan rra nana 207 27 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages ssseeeee 207 2 20 ThE Malach pull aaa 208 27 9 Service Port Access CONTO Lar la 210 27 10 Remote Management uri 211 Chapter 28 DINOS 213 ZO DESSEN ica 213 Chapter 29 ln e 215 A rca 215 2c TUO A la aliena aaa a 215 RA SRO ARS lia 216 Chapter 30 Cluster Manageme Mt oiiire a aa EE 219 30 1 Cluster Management Status Overview 219 30 2 Cluster Mahagement SAUS a m 220 30 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management eese 221 30 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch 222 30 3 Clustering Management Configuration seen 223 Chapter 31 MAGC TADIS cm 227 UT WIRE TOBIA iii AI AA AA AAA 227 22 MISMOS ine MAG TARE cela 228 Table of Contents 15 ES 3124 User s Guide Chapter 32 RRE TOD uns aid dias 229 32 AR lahe LISI Licia 229 32 11 HOW ARP VOS consi a 229 d MEMO Me ARP TADE si pa la 229 Chapter 33 CORIQUIEcIORE i 231 A 7e elena oeaaeeateiols 231 Chapter 34 Introducing Command ARAN nia 233 A UU PTS 233 de Desc gi iade ee NR 233 3421 Tho Console POW illa 233 20 2 01 1 MUSEO celeri 234 34 3 The Login Screen seria 234 AA Command Syntax Convent
47. ES 3124 User s Guide Note Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the switch 26 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the switch 1 In the Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 86 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system i Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the switch 26 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Note Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Chapter 26 Maintenance 193 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 87 Firmware Upgrade Upgrad To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse to the loca
48. Enables STP on the specified ports Specifies the the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge Specifies the priority for each port Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first Specifies which STP configuration these ports will participate in mrstp command only An example using spanning tree command is shown next e Enable STP on the switch Set the bridge priority of the switch to 0 Set the Hello Time to 4 Maximum Age to 20 and Forward Delay to 15 on the switch Enable STP on port 10 with a path cost of 150 Set the priority for port 10 to 20 ras ras ras ras config config config config spanning tree priority 0 spanning tree hello time 4 maximum age 20 forward delay 15 spanning tree 10 path cost 150 spanning tree 10 priority 20 278 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide 36 4 no Command Examples These are the commonly used command examples that belong to the no group of commands The no group commands are commands which are preceded by keyword no This command negates the intended action of the command In most cases the no command disables resets or clears settings There are cases however where the no command can activate features This section shows some
49. For example a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID With subnetting some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 1s equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations Table 97 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 124 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 125 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 126 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 127 1110 0000 224 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 323 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 97 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE DECIMAL 255 255 255 240 128 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 129 1111 1
50. GING scsi ninni claire 275 PE OTN EMPIRE rra 276 ROS EMP aa 277 302 no Command Examples scialli ian 279 36 4 1 Disable Commands a aa 279 304 2 ASESINO COMINO ala 279 3513 Reis le COMME ai 279 36 4 4 Other Examples of no Commiands eeclesie renta rena enar ne 280 SE MN ML amm 280 36 4 4 2 no port access authenticator sss 281 PAIA 281 20 5 Queuing Method COMEIBEIE cicoria dure cert cri eri 282 36 6 Stati Route GOMME sadica 282 207 Enabling MAG Feng sana 283 5 ENSIMA URRA ei 284 36 9 Enabling Port Authentication userai aba dla a 285 30 9 1 RADIUS Server SONGS scorie cei 285 36 9 2 Port Authentication Settings id 286 Chapter 37 interface Command ec 289 RR PP 289 37 2 Interface Command EXSImpIeS iius t 289 3121 Meade PORRES MM 289 et oe DPOUMCOMINON ica 289 St DRO Tee dj Lares 290 SAVAGE illo i 290 cwn e M P 291 orgy c o Fer TOT TNT NON 292 Sid MIRO A 292 II AP 293 ila 293 SERCAIIE CAT A E E 294 Table of Contents 17 ES 3124 User s Guide SEG IE lilla eL e ur t Ede 294 LIRA T U e C TT 295 RN Wd eani A e a E s 295 OP ERI qM T 295 37 3 Interface no Command Examples 1 erit adio aie io 296 21 9 1 MO EMI 296 Chapter 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 30 1 Configuring Tagged VLAN cir io ili i ici 297 38 2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configura
51. Pages 2 In the Static VLAN screen a VLAN Status select ACTIVE enter a ACTIVE v descriptive name in the Name ex Exempli VLAN Group ID 2 field and enter 2 in the VLAN i Group ID field for the VLAN2 em GR AG network ho Normal M Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging Note The VLAN Group ID field in 3 Normal C Fred Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging E 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging this screen and the VID field 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging in the IP Setup screen refer Pee Mm fea e tatam Eres Normal ixed orbidden M Tx Tagging to the same VLAN ID 8 amp Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 9 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging ene CIT Fixed C Forbidden TR n 3 Since the VLAN2 network is n E Fired E Forbice Tagging 12 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging connected to port 10 on the 13 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging switch select Fixed to configure 14 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v Tx Tagging 15 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging port 10 to be a permanent 16 Normal Fred C Forbidden F Tx Tagging member of the VLAN only 17 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 18 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging lA E Mumal CL ixed C Festidder Mx Taosing To ensure that VLAN unaware Le no T et S T a x e SR ds y d s 22 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging inn such as val an
52. Ports Ethernet switches Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 45 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 1 Panel Connections continued CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION Console Port Only connect this port if you want to configure the switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the Port Switch 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the switch Connect the female end to a serial port COMI COM or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Ethernet Ports The switch has 24 100 1000Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 100 1000Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled The speed of the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex at 100 Mbps or full duplex
53. Protocol 109 Multiple STP 109 MVR 175 configuration 176 configuration example 180 group configuration 179 how it works 176 modes 175 network example 175 ports 175 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 175 N network management system NMS 200 NTP RFC 1305 75 P password 56 changing 56 ping test connection 213 port authentication 137 IEEE802 1x 140 RADIUS server 139 port based VLAN type 76 port cloning 231 232 advanced settings 231 232 basic settings 231 232 port details 67 port isolation 94 101 Port Mirroring 261 port mirroring 32 127 and commands 291 port redundancy 131 port security 33 limit MAC address learning 145 port setup 81 port status 65 Port VID Default for all ports 260 port VLAN trunking 87 port based VLAN 98 all connected 101 port isolation 101 settings wizard 101 ports standby 131 and MVR 175 diagnostics 213 GBIC 36 mirroring 127 speed duplex 83 priority level 77 priority queue assignment 77 product registration 6 Product specification 317 protocol based VLAN 95 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 95 example 97 hexadecimal notation for protocols 96 isolate traffic 95 priority 96 PVID 85 94 PVID Priority Frame 85 Q queue weight 160 queuing 32 159 SPQ 160 332 Index ES 3124 User s Guide WFQ 160 WRR 160 queuing algorithm 159 162 queuing method 159 162 R rack mounting 42 RADIUS 137 advantages 137 network example 137 server 137 settings 139 RADIU
54. The fans cool the switch sufficiently to allow reliable operation of the switch in even poorly ventilated rooms or basements Power The ES 3124 requires 100 240 VAC 1 5A power 1 4 Applications This section shows a few examples of using the switch in various network environments Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 35 ES 3124 User s Guide 1 4 4 Backbone Application In this application the switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers directly to the switch s port or connect other switches to the switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 4 2 Bridging Example In this example application the switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the switch Moreover the switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a s
55. To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add Chapter 8 VLAN 97 ES 3124 User s Guide 8 9 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that 1s a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANS are specific only to the switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 8 9 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen see Figure 33 on page 88 and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen 98 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Figure 41 la o ha o
56. UDP Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 16 Port Authentication 139 ES 3124 User s Guide 16 2 2 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security From the Port Authentication screen display the configuration screen as shown 140 Chapter 16 Port Authentication ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 59 Port Authentication 802 1x Port Authentication Active r Port Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer t O On y seconds 1 O On y 3600 seconds 2 O On y 3600 seconds 3 r1 On 600 seconds 4 O On 3600 seconds 5 O On 7 eoo seconds 6 O On 600 seconds 7 O On 7 3600 seconds 8 O On y 3600 seconds 9 O On y 3600 sec
57. VLAN eene 61 Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID n 63 Figure 24 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address 64 FIS SAS e 66 Figure 26 Status Port DEI scores hp Ik ia eevee 68 gud Ni T2 FIJI ES General SOUP Um 74 FIS 2 AME asia 76 Figure 30 IP SEUD siii ali a AAA 79 ad o A TT 82 Figure 32 Pont VLAM TONNO lana 87 Figure 33 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type eese eene nennen 88 Figure 34 VLAN VLAN Status serieta x EROR RR Exin e EPA RR edd 88 Figure 35 Static VLAN Detalls ciccia ieri 89 Figure 30 VLAN Static VLAN sica ia 91 Figure 37 VLAN YLAN For Selling sara 93 Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 95 List of Figures 21 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 29 Protocol Based VLAN Lr ai 96 Figure 40 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example eee 97 Figure 41 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected 99 Figure 42 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation 100 Figure 43 Statie MAC Forwarding Lella 103 Figure d4 FIREN corinzi reali A E 105 Figure 45 MRSTP Network Example siii 109 Figure 46 Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MRSTP eene 110 Figure 47 IROSTECGONIIUEDL sacca TH Figure 48 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status i 113 Figure 49 MESTP Configuration rca 115 Figure S0 MRS TF QUIS 9 117 Figure oT BRR CONTO colei 12
58. Web Configurator ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the management IP address subnet mask necessary for switch management and DNS domain name server Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual switch ports Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the STP RSTP to prevent Protocol network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where y
59. a BPDU in the Port Setup screen Transparency MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active 76 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3124 User s Guide Table 10 Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds
60. are confined to a specific broadcast domain Chapter 7 Basic Setting 75 ES 3124 User s Guide Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 8 on page 85 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 7 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 29 Switch Setup a Switch Setup VLAN Type Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active r MAC Address Learning Aging Time 00 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level6 6 y level5 5 y leveld 4 y level3 3 y level2 hi7 level1 o level 2 7 80210 C PortBased Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 8 on page 85 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the switch to handle bridging control protocols STP for Protocol example You also need to define how to treat
61. as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 22 1 3 IGMP Snooping A switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them Chapter 22 Multicast 169 ES 3124 User s Guide The switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch 22 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications and Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 22 1 on page 169 for more information on multicasting Figure 70 Multicast Status Multicast Status Multicast Setting index VID Port Multicast Group 1 1 22 224 0 1 22 The following tab
62. automatic registration 86 ID 85 ingress filtering 94 introduction 75 number of VLANs 88 port isolation 94 port number 89 port settings 92 port based VLAN 98 static VLAN 90 status 88 89 tagged 85 trunking 87 type 76 87 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 31 75 VLAN Stacking 33 163 VLAN trunking 94 VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN vlan1q port accept 300 vlan1q port gvrp 300 vlan1q svlan active 302 vlan1q svlan delentry 302 vlan1q svlan inactive 303 vlan1q svlan list 303 vlan1q svlan setentry 276 305 VSA 137 334 Index ES 3124 User s Guide W warning lights 49 warnings 4 warranty 6 note 6 web configurator getting help 60 help 60 home 52 logging out 60 login 51 navigation panel 53 screen summary 54 weight queuing 160 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 160 WFQ Weighted Fair Scheduling 160 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 160 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 195 Index 335
63. b Default z Auto 17 O n NN Default Auto 18 O rH NN Default Auto 19 O D fo Default Auto 20 n n f Default Auto 21 O O fo Default Auto y 22 r O fo Default y Auto 23 O O fo Default Auto 24 O O fo Default Auto 25 O r f Default Auto 26 O O b Default Auto 27 O O f Default y Auto 28 O 0 f Default Auto Apply Cancel Chapter 22 Multicast 171 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use thise settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port Leave Timeout Enter an IGMP leave timeout value from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds This defines how many seconds the switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received from a host 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority Multicast Frame IGMP Filte
64. begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 104 Chapter 9 Static MAC Forwarding ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Filtering This chapter discusses static IP and MAC address port filtering 10 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering means sifting traffic going through the switch based on the source and or destination MAC addresses and VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application and Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 44 Filtering LE Filtering 1 Active C Name Discard source Discard destination ae RI s s E E aw VID Action Add Cancel Clear index Active Name MAC Address
65. check 37 2 8 frame type Syntax frame type all tagged untagged where all tagged u Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just ntagged gt tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable ingress checking on the ports Enable tagged frame types on the interface ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface ingress check ras config interface frame type tagged 37 2 9 weight Syntax weight lt wt1 gt lt wt2 gt lt wt8 gt where lt wt1 gt lt wt2 gt Sets the interface WFQ weighting A weight value of one to eight is lt wt8 gt given to each variable from wt 1towt 8 An example is shown next e Enable WFQ queuing on the switch Enable port two and ports six to twelve for configuration Chapter 37 Interface Commands 293 ES 3124 User s Guide 37 2 10 37 2 11 Set the queue weights from Q0 to Q7 ras configure ras config wfq ras config interface port channel 2 6 12 ras config interface weight 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 egress set Syntax egress set lt port list gt where lt port list gt Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port based VLAN An example is shown next Enable port based VLAN tagging on the switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the outgo
66. config vlan inactive Chapter 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 297 ES 3124 User s Guide 38 2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands This section shows you how to configure and monitor the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 38 2 1 GARP Status Syntax show garp This command shows the switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave and leave all timers An example is shown next ras show garp GARP Timer Join Timer 200 Leave Timer 600 Leave All Timer 10000 rast 38 2 2 GARP Timer Syntax garp join lt msec gt leave lt msec gt leaveall lt msec gt where join lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds leave lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds leaveall This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in lt msec gt milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer the default is 10000 milliseconds This command sets the switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave and leave all timers 298 Chapter 38 IEEE 802
67. consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed System Name Enter the geographic location of your switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Location Contact Person s Enter the name of the person in charge of this switch You can use up to 32 Name printable ASCII characters spaces are not allowed Login Use this drop down list box to select which database the switch should use first to Precedence authenticate an administrator user for switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen The RADIUS is an external server Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first Select Local Only to have the switch just check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen Select Local then RADIUS to have the switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen If the user name is not found the switch then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server You need to configure Port Authentication Radius first Select RADIUS Only to have the switch just check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a login username password and the access privilege 74 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3124 User s Guide Table 9 General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Server when
68. customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port 21 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 48 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID 164 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking ES 3124 User s Guide Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100 TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the switch then the switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize
69. for configuration Set the speed to 100 Mbps in half duplex mode ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface speed duplex 100 half 37 2 14 test You can perform an interface loopback test on specified ports The test returns Passed or Failed Chapter 37 Interface Commands 295 ES 3124 User s Guide An example is shown next Select ports 33 36 for internal loopback test Execute the test command View the results ras config interface port channel 33 44 ras config interface test 33 36 Testing internal loopback on port 33 Passed Ethernet Port 33 Test ok esting internal loopback on port 34 Passed Ethernet Port 34 Test ok esting internal loopback on port 35 Passed Ethernet Port 35 Test ok esting internal loopback on port 36 Passed Ethernet Port 36 Test ok m m m 37 3 Interface no Command Examples Similar to the no commands in the Enable and Config modes the no commands for the Interface sub mode also disable certain features In this mode however this takes place on a port by port basis 37 3 1 no bandwidth limit You can disable bandwidth limit on port 1 simply by placing the no command in front of the bandwidth limit command Syntax no bandwidth limit An example is shown next Disable bandwidth limit on portl ras config interface port channel 1 ras config interface no bandwidth limit
70. for full duplex IEEE 802 3x RJ 45 Ethernet cable connector Gigabit 2 GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has one 1000Base T copper port and one Small Interface Form Factor Pluggable SFP fiber port with one port active at a time Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering port lock Broadcast storm control Limited maximum number of MAC addresses per port Switching Switching fabric 13 6Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 1522 bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet II PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1d spanning tree protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w rapid reconfiguration to recover network failure Up to 6 STP configurations QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues Supports RFC 2475 DiffServ DSCP to IEEE 802 1p priority mapping Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC Address Forward VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 256 static VLANs Supports GVRP Protocol based VLAN support Link Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking aggregation Up to six groups and each group can aggregate up to eight ports Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Bandwidth Supports rate limiting at 64Kbps increment control Appendix A Product Specifications 317 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 92 Management Specifications System Control Alarm Status surveillance LED indication for alar
71. frames 38 3 4 2 2 Untagged Frames 1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN 2 The switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1 3 The switch ignores the port from which the frame came because the switch does not send a frame to the port from which it came The switch also does not forward frames to forbidden ports 4 If after looking at the SVLAN the switch does not have any ports to which it will send the frame it won t check the port filter 38 3 5 Delete VLAN ID Syntax no vlan vlan id where vlan id The VLAN ID 1 4094 This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table ras config no vlan 2 38 4 Enable VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 302 Chapter 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 3124 User s Guide 38 5 Disable VLAN Syntax vlan lt vlan id gt inactive This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 38 6 Show VLAN Setting Syntax show vlan This command shows the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged SVLAN Static VLAN table An example is shown next e VID is the VLAN identification number Status shows whether the VLAN is static or active Elap Time is the time since the VLAN was created on the switch e The TagCt1 section of the last column shows which po
72. gt Sets the IP address and subnet 13 lt mask gt mask of the switch in the specified VLAN default gateway Sets a default gateway IP address 13 lt ip address gt for this VLAN 34 11 6 mvr Commands The following table lists the mvr commands in configuration mode Table 87 mvr Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE mvr lt 1 Enters the MVR Multicast VLAN 13 4094 gt Registration configuration mode source port Sets the source port s 13 lt port list gt An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN receiver port Sets the receiver port s 13 lt port list gt An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN inactive Disables MVR settings 13 mode Sets the MVR mode dynamic or 13 lt dynamic compati compatible ble gt name lt name str gt Sets the MVR name for 13 identification purposes tagged port Sets the port s to tag VLAN tags 13 list 264 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 87 mvr Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE group lt name str gt Sets the multicast group range for 13 start address the MVR lt ip gt end address lt ip gt exit Exist from the MVR configuration 13 mode 8021p priority Sets a priority level 0 7 to which 13 0 7 the switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets no source port Disables the s
73. s Guide Figure 83 DiffServ e zig 8 24 32 40 48 56 24s 4 ODE EP DSCP to 802 1p Mapping N h Aa 0 N gt q 4 a I F 2 os 2 os ba bad ba ba 7 oz fe oha uha whe seha iS 1s fix 2 9 s 2e shka 20 22 2 25 22 27 23 2 Re 26 3 27 375 28 32 29 35 30 35 37 4v 324 4 235 4 36 47 37 ae 38 f47 39 47 sz ss sm sm sm 46 55 47 ss 67 soles s fey 5 67 5 67 safes ss 6 735 sl sf opa ap pH eps ez Cancel A i The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 60 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Diffserv Click this to return to the main DiffServ screen DSCP to In this section you map each DSCP value with an 802 1p value in the drop down list 802 1p box Mapping 0 63 This field displays each DSCP value 802 1p Priority Use the drop down list box to select the IEEE 802 1p priority 0 to 7 to which you would like to map this DSCP value Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 190 Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 26 Maintenance This cha
74. second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured 11 5 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP select MRSTP in the Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP 114 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 49 MRSTP Configuration Status Forwarding Delay MAX Age 20 seconds Hello Time p seconds Bridge Priority Active Tree TN EN 32768 y 32768 20 seconds bj seconds LlelololololololololololalololololololololelloloL LLL Path Cost Priority he le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le le Muocucuocuopucocuuuuubpunpucoucuuuuuuu lt pee etter ae Ue A a A IR AE RAS ciciciciceiciciecicio e 24 25 26 27 28 Port 21 22 23 Aeply Cancel 115 Chapt
75. service port https socket Allows HTTPS access on the 13 number specified service port remote index Enables a specified secured 13 management client set Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 257 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE index start Specifies a group of trusted 13 addr ip end computer s from which an addr ip service administrator may use a service telnet ftp to manage the switch http icmp snmp ssh https gt admin lt pw string gt Changes the administrator 14 password lt confirm string gt password syslog Enables syslog logging on the 13 switch server lt ip Enables syslog logging to the 13 address gt specified syslog server server lt ip Disables syslog logging to the 13 address gt specified syslog server Sets the IP address of the syslog 13 server and the severity level type lt type gt Sets the log type and the file 13 facility local 1 location on the syslog server 7 vlan Enables VLAN stacking on the 13 stacking switch lt SPTPID gt Sets the SP TPID Service 13 Provider Tag Protocol Identifier default in band out of Specifies through which traffic 13 management band gt flow the switch is to send packets ssh known hosts Adds a remote host to which the 13 lt host ip gt switch can access using SSH
76. settings on the port s igmp filtering Displays IGMP filter profile 13 settings on the port s igmp group Displays IGMP group settings on 13 limited the port s igmp query mode Displays IGMP query mode 13 settings on the port s protocol based Displays protocol based VLAN 13 vlan settings on the port s vlan Displays the status of all VLANs 13 lt vlan id gt Displays the status of the specified 13 VLAN running config Displays current operating 13 configuration help Displays detailed information and 13 parameters for this command interface port Displays current operating 13 channel port configuration on a port by port list basis Optionally specifies which bandwidth settings are displayed DML a timesync Displays time server information 13 time Displays current system time and 13 date garp Displays GARP information 13 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 243 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 83 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE loginPrecedence Displays login precedence 13 settings logging Displays system logs 13 vlan stacking Displays VLAN stacking 13 configuration ssh Displays general SSH settings 13 known hosts Displays known SSH hosts 13 information key Displays internal SSH public and 13 rsal rsa dsa private key information session Displays cu
77. switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 167 ES 3124 User s Guide 168 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 22 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively 22 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 22 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such
78. the switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the switch These rubber feet help protect the switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 41 ES 3124 User s Guide 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four MS flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Note Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary
79. the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 19 on page 153 to configure policy rules 18 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 19 on page 153 Click Advanced Application and Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as sho
80. the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number P Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN throu
81. the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 10 on page 76 for more information BPDU C
82. to send information to groups of computers There is also a class E It is reserved for future use The following table shows the allowed ranges for the first octet of each class This range determines the number of subnets you can have in a network Table 95 Allowed IP Address Range By Class CLASS ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET BINARY Apri la AD OEEIRST Class A 00000000 to 01111111 0 to 127 Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191 Class C 11000000 to 11011111 192 to 223 Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239 Class E 11110000 to 11111111 240 to 255 reserved 322 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 3124 User s Guide Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The natural masks for class A B and C IP addresses are as follows Table 96 Natural Masks CLASS NATURAL MASK A 255 0 0 0 B 255 255 0 0 C 255 255 255 0 Subnetting With subnetting the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored
83. uc 47 1 32 Transcelver Removal sccicssivcecesssqucecedecsonescrsacecisiaenieieasvebraanmeacsnaaate 48 TAREN PANG ea alari 48 Sale Power COME iaa 49 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector 49 o PROMO ane LEDS anions ox ala ves dedico nexo eoa BA al 49 Chapter 4 Il Xylimei ie baniRAnAS 51 e ue dump du IMPR RUE eM MEME ME 51 A A 51 23 WE SAIS Spron O a o O OOOO 52 AA MENU QNVEPUIEW 53 25 1 Change Your Password iaia ai 56 4o Saving Your CONE ANION sla 57 ARI A Cep A rema oo e Poe 57 4 7 Resetting the Switch Lia Lada LI RP aA Pt Ga KaL ERA ARR e Rd 58 4 7 1 Reload the Configuration File cesiones 58 4 7 2 Reset to the Factory Defaeblis ri tart rrr reet 59 4 8 Logging Out of the Web Configurator sr ea 60 SH cieli 60 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example aiii ni 61 NUES a acacia 61 54 1 Creating a VLAN m ea 61 a A aet E i ae era deed d din leaves 63 5 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address eene 64 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 110r rece aana 65 6 1 Port Status SUMMARY csrl rara 65 81 1 Slats Part Dede sidecar 67 10 Table of Contents ES 3124 User s Guide Chapter 7 Basie SEWING aiar 71 LIE 71 Te SYSSM INFOATAMONI scri ioni iis 71 Li Genga Gel Pe 73 TA Nroduction to VIANE lla tes Eee giae A lisi 76 RIP clacio 78 7 6
84. value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Specifies the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 277 ES 3124 User s Guide maximum age 6 40 forward delay 4 30 lt port list gt path cost 1 65535 lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt lt port list gt treeIndex lt 1 2 gt Specifies the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network Specifies the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result
85. when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 27 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 94 SSH Communication Example Internet SSH Server n gt SSH Clieni 27 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts 204 Chapter 27 Access Control ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 95 How SSH Works N Internet N i Y 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client t
86. which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet Type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port 96 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide Table 18 Protocol Based VLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 8 8 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 10 and 15 Follow these steps 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type IP VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value IP 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 6 Leave the priority set to 0 and click Add Figure 40 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example ED Protocol Based VLAN ng Vlan Port Setting Active iv Port 1 Name IP VLAN IP Ethernet type C Others Hex VID 5 Priority 0 Ade Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel
87. 0 Figure 52 Broadcast Storm Contral sia ri 124 Figure S3 MITON TTE T T TM 128 Figure 54 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status 132 Figure 55 Link Aggregation Configuration 134 Figure 56 RADIUS SOIVEF Mee 137 Figure 57 Port Authentication circa 139 Figure 58 Port Authentication RADIUS iii 139 Figura 59 For Authentication BO 1K Lilla 141 Figure 50 POR SEGUI dM O O 144 RS Rupe AAA T 148 Figura 62 Classifier Summary Table iia 150 Figure o3 LaS MEE Example cet cei 152 as bo dc or A A 154 Figure 65 Policy Summary Table criari 156 Figure 69 Pole Explain AA id 158 Figure 67 Quasi Mod ille 161 Figure 68 VLAN Stacking Exemple ciccia 164 Figure 69 VLAN Stacking sula da ei 166 Figuro 70 Milia 170 Figure 71 Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile cao 174 Figure 72 MVR Network Example ascii o ite 175 Figure 73 MVR Multicast Television Example ecce 176 FINGER iii iaia ea 177 Figure 75 MYR Group Configuration sica 179 Figure 76 MYR Configuration Exemple cicci ceneri cenare cane 180 Figure 77 MYR Configuration Exampl uuu cett rita re 181 Figure 78 MYR Group Configuration Example 182 Figure 79 MVR Group Configuration Example coordin 182 Figure B0 DHCP BOB as a iod anda erdt la 184 Figure 31 cid Tio e 185 22 List of Figures ES 3124 User s Guide FIM GS Oz DIS M 188 ERE RR AI 1
88. 0 0 0 0 00 00 24 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 25 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 26 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 27 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 28 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 G Any Clear Counter C potl The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 26 on page 68 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port 66 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statisti
89. 000 A 3 oo Ww NW NW FW NM NM MP ooo poo oOo Oo o O non booo ooo o o o o n o 0 ooo booo h o non n o n 0 0 _Q Remote Management Access Control Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Access Control Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this End Address SWitch The switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the switch from the specified trusted HTTP ICMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 212 Chapt
90. 000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 The first mask shown is the class C natural mask Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used Example Two Subnets As an example you have a class C address 192 168 1 0 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Table 98 Two Subnets Example IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 The first three octets of the address make up the network number class C To make two networks divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 and 192 168 1 128 with mask 255 255 255 128 Note In the following charts shaded bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits borrowed to make network ID bits The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have The remaining number of host ID bits after borrowing determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet Table 99 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address B
91. 1 6 7 36 4 4 3 no ssh Syntax no ssh key lt rsal rsa dsa gt no ssh known hosts lt host ip gt no ssh known hosts host ip 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa where key rsal rsal dsa Disables the secure shell server encryption key Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts lt host ip gt Removes a specific remote host from the list of all known hosts known hosts host ip Removes remote known hosts with a specified public key 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa type 1024 bit RSAI RSA or DSA An example is shown next Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 281 ES 3124 User s Guide Disable the secure shell RSA1 encryption key Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 8 from the list of known hosts Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 9 and with an SSH RSA encryption key from the list of known hosts ras config no ssh key rsal ras config no ssh known hosts 172 165 1 8 ras config no ssh known hosts 172 165 1 9 ssh rsa 36 5 Queuing Method Commands You can use the queuing method commands to configure queuing for outgoing traffic on the switch You can only select one queuing method for the switch Syntax spq wfq WES wrr fe spq lt Q0 Q7 gt where Spq Sets the queuing method to SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing wfq Sets the queuing method to WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing wrr Sets the queuing method to WRR Weighted Ro
92. 1 Port Status Summary The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary table with links to each port showing statistical details To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 65 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 25 Status D Port Status Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s Rx KB s Up Time Al Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ud Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 17 Down STOP Disabled D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 20 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 21 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 22 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 23 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0
93. 17 Down STOP Disabled 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 C Any ear Counter cop A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is the configuration of your switch that stays the same even if the switch s power is turned off C Click this link to go to the status page of the switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens 52 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 3124 User s Guide 4 4 Menu Overview In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION ROUTING PROTOCOL MANAGEMENT ced Application i pplic Advanced Application IP Application IP Application Management System Into General Setup VLAN Static Routing Maintenance Switch Setup Static MAC Forwarding DiffServ Access Control IP Setup Filtering Diagnostic Port Setup Spanning Tree Protocol Syslog Bandwidth Control Cluster Management Bro
94. 2 MAC Table FIOWGHhart seu sse erra ii 227 Foure 119 MAC TDO allea 228 Figure T14 AGI TADIG rca 230 Figure 115 Configure Clone uei enit cn raw tices eae td E olii 231 Figure 116 no port access authenticator Command Example 281 Figure 117 Popup Block lai ira 308 Foue TIS c ite CLR 309 Figure 119 intemet OPTONS Me 310 Figure 120 Pop up Blocker Settings ica iii 311 Foue 11 Titers SIGS E 312 Figure 122 Security Settings Java Scripting eene nnns 313 Figure 123 Security Settings Java Licia iaia ai 314 Figure 124 JAVA SUM corsa atrata 315 List of Figures 23 ES 3124 User s Guide 24 List of Figures ES 3124 User s Guide List of Tables Table T Papel Cenere Lalli 45 Tobie 2 Font Panel LEE a erai b eate el a ab iE epi ed axe 49 Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview i 53 Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details sesesesessssss 54 Table 5 Navigation Panel Links cunas 55 Table O GUS m 66 Tobie 7 Status Pom SIS ai 68 Table e oysa WS aaa 72 TES Y Deneral Se iaia sie 74 Table EVE clio 76 Table E lla 80 Table TZ PORTE SEDI a aa a 82 Table 13 IEEE 802 T0 VLAN Termihology anno 86 Table 14 VLAN VLAN SESS piloni iaia 88 Table 15 Statie VLAN Detail na la 89 Table T6 VLAN Static VLAN cnn 92 Table 17 VLAN VLAN Fort Seling clelia 94 Table 18 Protocol Based VLAN Setup _ i 96 Table 19 Port Based VLAN S
95. 254 Example Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets Similarly to divide a class C address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones 1s the broadcast address on the subnet Table 101 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER seed E IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 325 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 101 Subnet 1 continued LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 102 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VADE ANI DIL IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 103 Subnet 3
96. 296 Chapter 37 Interface Commands ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN and associated commands 38 1 Configuring Tagged VLAN The following procedure shows you how to configure tagged VLAN 1 Use the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tagged VLAN for the switch e Use the vlan lt vlan id gt command to configure or create a VLAN on the switch The switch automatically enters the config vlan mode Use the inactive command to deactivate the VLAN s e Use the interface port channel port list command to enter the config interface mode to set the VLAN settings on a port then use the pvid lt vlan id gt command to set the VLAN ID you created for the port list to that specific port in the PVID table e Use the exit command when you are finished configuring the VLAN ras config vlan 2000 ras config vlan name upl ras config vlan fixed 10 12 ras config vlan no untagged 10 12 ras config vlan exit ras config interface port channel 10 12 ras config interface pvid 2000 ras config interface exit 2 Configure your management VLAN e Use the vlan vlan id command to create a VLAN VID 3 in this example for managing the switch and the switch will activate the new management VLAN Use the inactive command to disable the new management VLAN ras config vlan 3 ras
97. 3 path cost lt 1 specified port 65535 gt lt port list gt Sets the priority for a specified 13 priority lt 0 255 gt port help Displays help information 13 mrstp lt treeIndex gt Activates the specified STP 13 configuration interface lt port Activates STP on the specified 13 list gt ports path cost lt 1 Sets a path cost to the specified 13 56535 gt ports priority lt 0 Sets the priority value to the 13 255 gt specified ports for STP treeIndex lt 1 Assigns a specific STP 13 6 gt configuration to the ports help Displays the detailed help for the 13 mrstp command hostname lt name_string gt Sets the switch s name for 13 identification purposes time lt Hour Min Sec gt Sets the time in hour minute and 13 second format timezone Selects the time difference 13 1200 1200 between UTC formerly known as GMT and your time zone date month day Sets the date in year month and 13 year day format help Displays help information 13 timesync daytime time nt Sets the time server protocol 13 p gt server lt ip gt Sets the IP address of your time 13 server loginPrece lt LocalOnly Select which database the switch 14 dence LocalRADIUS should use first to authenticate a RADIUSOnly gt user bcp Enables Bridge Control Protocol 13 transparen BCP transparency cy queue priority 0 72 Sets the priority level to physical 13 level 0 7 queue mapping 256 Chapter 34 Introducing Co
98. 4094 Specifies the MVR source ports which send and receive multicast traffic Specifies the MVR receiving ports which only receive multicast traffic A name to identify the multicast VLAN group Specifies dynamic sends IGMP reports to all source ports in the multicast VLAN or compatible does not send IGMP reports Chapter 39 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 305 ES 3124 User s Guide group name A name to identify the MVR IP multicast group name str start address Specifies the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in SUPE dotted decimal notation end address ip Specifies the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the start address if you want to configure only one IP address for the multicast group Enter MVR mode Create a multicast VLAN with the name multiVlan and the VLAN ID of 3 Specify source ports 21 23 25 and receiver ports 26 29 Specify dynamic mode for the mutlicast group e Configure MVR multicast group addresses by the name of ipgroup e Exit MVR mode See the following example ras config mvr 3 name multivlan ras config mvr source port 21 23 25 receiver port 26 29 ras config mvr mode dynamic ras config mvr group ipgroup start address 224 0 0 1 end address 224 0 0 255 ras config mvr exit 306 Chapter 39 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands ES 3124 U
99. 5 ras config interface pvid 200 38 3 2 Set Acceptable Frame Type Syntax frame type all tagged untagged where lt all tagged Specifies all Ethernet frames tagged and untagged only tagged untagged Ethernet frames or only untagged Ethernet frames This command sets the specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The following example sets ports 1 to 5 to accept only tagged frames ras config interface port channel 1 5 ras config interface frame type tagged 38 3 3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP on the port s Use the no gvrp command to disable GVRP The following example turns off GVRP for ports 1 to 5 ras config interface port channel 1 5 ras config interface no gvrp 300 Chapter 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 3124 User s Guide 38 3 4 Modify Static VLAN Use the following commands in the config vlan mode to configure the static VLAN table Syntax vlan lt vlan id gt fixed lt port list gt forbidden lt port list gt name lt name str gt normal lt port list gt untagged lt port list gt no fixed lt port list gt no forbidden lt port list gt no untagged lt port list gt where lt vlan id gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 name str A name to identify the SVLAN entry lt port list gt This is the switch port list Enter fixed to register t
100. 5 MRSTP Network Example 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Main Screen The switch allows you to configure a single RSTP configuration or you can configure multiple configurations Click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to choose whether you want to configure multiple or a single Spanning Tree Protocol configuration Note This screen is only available if neither RSTP or MRSTP is active Once you select RSTP or MRSTP this screen displays the status of your configuration Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 109 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 46 Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MRSTP a EXACT RSTP Click here MRSTP Click here The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION RSTP This link takes you to the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration screen See Section 11 3 on page 110 MRSTP This link takes you to the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration screen See Section 11 3 on page 110 11 3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol screen 110 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 47 RSTP Configuration A OEE Iree co Status Active E Bridge Priority 3276
101. 55 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A address has three host ID octets see Table 94 on page 322 available for subnetting Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 327 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning Table 107 Class B Subnet Planning EE HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS ape ale PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 328 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 3124 User s Guide Symbols standby ports 131 Nu
102. 8 Hello Time les Seconds MAX Age 20 Seconds Forwarding Delay hs Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost Li 1 iv o8 5 2 Ie 28 fa 3 iv is 3 4 Iv hize fiz 5 8 fig 6 O a8 fig 7 a 28 io 8 OD hize fig 9 n i28 fig 10 r a8 fis 11 O ies fis 12 r i28 fis 13 O 28 fig 14 ze fo 15 C 128 fig 16 r 28 fig 17 CO 128 fig 18 fizs ra 19 r1 128 fig 20 D EJ fa 21 Ci 128 fig 22 ies fa 23 m 128 fig 24 O ies fig 25 O 128 4 26 rz8 4 27 r1 128 4 28 28 4 Apply Cancel Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 111 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 RSTP Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 48 on page 113 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root Switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwa
103. 90 Figure 84 Maintenant sanare ira A 191 Figure 85 Load Factory Default Start circle 192 Figure 86 Reboot System CODBEIBEOEI Lilia 193 ursa Firmware Upgrade cirio eni deliri n cea ian 194 Figure 88 Restore LONfigurationi usse ierra kk Pk da eR E a ERR PA ua nc 194 Figura 89 Backup GOmigilaublt clear 195 Foue Se Access Gi aa 199 Figure 91 SNMP Management Model 200 Figure 92 Access Control SNMP 202 Figure 93 Access Control Logis arse AAA AA 203 Figure 94 SSH Communication EXaImplge uenti e upra error 204 Figure 95 How SSH WOKS siii 205 Figure 96 HTTPS Implementation uaar ei 206 Figure 97 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer 207 Figure 98 Security Certificate 1 Netscape i 208 Figure 99 Security Certificate 2 Netscape ciciinionmicnionionricnccnnaracccar narra rro naaa 208 Figure 100 Login Screen Internet Explorer i 209 Figure 101 Login Screen CNereca e sica 210 Figure 102 Access Control Service Access Control 211 Figure 103 Access Control Remote Management 212 RC A 3b cp 213 FRS cca 218 Figura 106 Syslog Saetta ai 217 Figure 107 Clustering Application Example _ monos 220 Figure 108 Cluster Management Status uiececessceec ie 221 Figure 109 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen 222 Figure 110 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch 223 Figure 111 Clustering Management Configuration nn 224 Figure 11
104. AC Table Figure 113 Click Management MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen DLE Sort by Index 1 2 3 4 5 MAC Table MAC VID Port MAC Address VID Port Type 00 85 30 01 01 00 1 8 dynamic 00 85 30 01 01 04 1 8 dynamic 00 a0 c5 00 00 01 1 2 dynamic O0 a0 c5 fe ea 71 1 CPU static 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 2 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen 228 Chapter 31 MAC Table ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 32 ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 32 1 ARP Table Overview A
105. APTER 16 Port Authentication This chapter describes the 802 1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup See Section 36 9 on page 285 for information on how to use the commands to configure additional Radius server settings as well as multiple Radius server configuration 16 1 Port Authentication Overview IEEE 802 1x is an extended authentication protocol that allows support of RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server 16 1 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location Figure 56 RADIUS Server Ness m Client RADIUS Server a 16 1 1 1 Vendor Specific Attribute A Vendor Specific Attribute VSA is an attribute value pair that is sent between a RADIUS server and the ES 3124 Configure VSAs on the RADIUS server to set the ES 3124 to perform the following actions on an authenticated user Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic Assign account prilivege levels 2 Atthe time of writing only Windows XP of the Microsoft operating syste
106. An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 100 1000Mpbs and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off 46 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 3124 User s Guide 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled You can change transceivers while the switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps Note To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fib
107. Control You can specify the service s and computer IP address es to control access to the switch for management Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Configuration and Firmware Maintenance You can backup or restore the switch configuration or upgrade the firmware on the switch Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 33 ES 3124 User s Guide IP Protocols P Host No routing Telnet for configuration and monitoring SNMP for management SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 SNMP v1 RFC 1157 e SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP Ethernet MIBs RFC 1643 Bridge MIBs RFC 1493 e SMIREC 1155 e RMON RFC 1757 e SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 2674 System Monitoring System status link status rates statistics counters SNMP Temperatures voltage fan speed reports and alarms Port Mirroring allows you to analyze one port s traffic from another Security System management password protection Port based VLAN e IEEE 802 1Q VLAN e 802 1x Authentication Limit dynamic port MAC address learning Static MAC address filtering Bandwidth Control The ES 3124 supports rate limiting in 64
108. DRHGP Relay 183 29 1 DHCP Relay CEPIS ilari iii olivia Licei 183 23 1 1 DHCP Relay Agent Iota Dt iii 183 23 2 DHCP s Ii yes illa 183 Chapter 24 SAO ASUS ili 185 CAMINO SAS ROE lilla 185 Chapter 25 Biffsere Code Poltica aii 187 2 DS II A A TTE 187 Pp e ARIEL oseh ep pea iret A 187 25 3 Contgure DSCP Setting suscrita 189 Chapter 26 MaintenanG e 191 20 1 The Maintenance Seren uos iii n BA uda iii 191 02 ere BI Ir 1T rre 192 20355 CORIO P 192 LA EDO RI aaa cond Gud ina a oncaeid Pepsi EDAM NUES RAUS 193 26 9 Firmware Upgrade cm 193 266 Restore a DONIDUREDI File soll aa 194 26 7 Backup a Coniiguraton File scia 194 200 IE ULIS cisini a 195 26 8 1 Filename Conventions sica ar a 195 256 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ice 196 26 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure rici 196 26 8 3 GUI bassd FTP Clients iaia pia aii i ad 197 20 04 PIP RESTICIONS scie 197 14 Table of Contents ES 3124 User s Guide Chapter 27 PCOS ON TO Lai in 199 27 1 Access Control Overview ia 199 27 2 The Access Control Mali GOFBONI ici iaia 199 ZI SOUT SNDE rs ilo 200 Dies 580ppored MIES sare 201 Fate Leali 201 2720 COMU SNMP a ao e ia 202 27 34 Setting Up Login ACCOUNTS ciccia caera 202 270 5 SM A aa 204 21 5 HOW SI WORKS a 204 27 amp SSH Implementation on tie SIE ciali 205 27 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH iii 206 27 Rune ATTS di E
109. ES 3124 Intelligent Layer 3 Switch 24 port Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports 2 GbE Dual Personality Interfaces Copper SFP User s Guide Version 3 70 7 2006 Edition 1 ZyXEL ES 3124 User s Guide Copyright Copyright O 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Copyright 1 ES 3124 User s Guide Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statem
110. Kbps increments allowing you to create different service plans The ES 3124 supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch Broadcast storm control Quality of Service Eight queues so you can ensure mission critical data gets delivered on time Follows the IEEE 802 1p priority setting standard based on source destination MAC addresses 34 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 3124 User s Guide 1 3 Hardware Features This section describes the hardware features of the ES 3124 24 10 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet Ports Connect up to 24 computers or switches to the 10 100 Mbps auto negotiating automatic cable sensing auto MDIX Ethernet RJ 45 ports Mini GBIC Slots Install SPF transceivers in these slots to connect to other Ethernet switches at longer distances than the Ethernet port Gigabit Ethernet Ports These ports allow the switch to connect to another WAN switch or daisy chain to other switches Management Port Connect a computer to this port for management purposes You cannot access the network through this port Console Port Use the console port for local management of the switch Backup Power Supply Port Connect a backup power supply device to this port to ensure uninterrupted network connection in the event of a power failure Fans
111. M TxTagging Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete i Yes O 2 Yes VLAN2 E Delete Cancel Chapter 8 VLAN 91 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 16 VLAN Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on t
112. Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Start Address 230 1 2 50 224 1 4 10 230 1 2 60 224 1 4 50 End Address Delete All O Delete Group Delete Cancel 182 Chapter 22 Multicast ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 23 DHCP Relay This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP relay 23 1 DHCP Relay Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a DHCP server You can configure the switch to relay client DHCP requests to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients 23 1 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information 23 2 The switch can add information to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests You can also specify additional information for the switch to add to the client DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client TCP IP configuration request frames that the switch relays to a DHCP server The following lists the DHCP relay agent option 82 information that the switch sends to the DHCP server Slot ID 1 byte Port ID 1 byte VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 by
113. NMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 and or SNMP version 2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 91 SNMP Management Model Manager i Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple re
114. P traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually IGMP Snooping The switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The switch allows you to create multiple STP configurations and assign ports to a specific tree Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link 32 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 3124 User s Guide P
115. PQ 13 Strictly Priority Queuing wfq Sets the queuing method to WFQ 13 Weighted Fair Queuing wrr Sets the queuing method to WRR 13 Weighted Round Robin 250 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE fe spq Sets the switch to use SPQ to 13 lt q0 ql service the subsequent queue s q7 gt after and including the specified queue for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports ip route lt ip gt lt mask gt Creates a static route 13 lt next hop ip gt lt ip gt lt mask gt Sets the metric of a static route or 13 next hop ip deactivates a static route metric metric name lt name gt inactive name server ip Sets the IP address of a domain 13 name server address default ip Sets the default gateway s IP 13 gateway address for the out of band management port address ip mask Sets the IP address and subnet 13 mask of the out of band management port mac name name mac Configures a static MAC address 13 forward mac addr vlan forwarding rule vlan id interface lt interface id gt inactive Disables a static MAC address 13 forwarding rule mac filter name lt name gt mac Configures a static MAC address 13 lt mac addr gt vlan port filtering rule lt vlan id gt drop lt src dst both gt inactive Disab
116. Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the ES 3124 Intelligent Layer 3 Switch This preface introduces you to the ES 3124 and discusses the conventions of this User s Guide It also provides information on other related documentation About This User s Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the installation and configuration of your ES 3124 for its various applications Related Documentation Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information ZyXEL Web Site Please go to http www zyxel com for product news firmware updated documents and other support materials Syntax Conventions e Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example In Windows click Start Settings and then Control Panel means first click the Start button then point your mouse pointer to Settings and then click Control Panel e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words The ES 3124 Intelligent Layer 3 Switch may be referred to as the ES 3124 or the switch in this User s Guid
117. R for the gigabit ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 162 Chapter 20 Queuing Method ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 21 VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your switch See the chapter on VLANS for more background information on Virtual LAN 21 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANS even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no
118. S Remote Authentication Dial In User Service 137 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP See STP 107 reboot load configuration 193 reboot system 193 registration product 6 Related Documentation 29 remote management 211 service 212 trusted computers 212 reset 58 resetting 192 to factory default settings 192 resetting the switch 58 restore configuration 58 restoring configuration 194 RFC 3164 215 RFC 3580 138 Round Robin Scheduling 160 RSTP 107 See also Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP 32 rubber feet installation hardware rubber feet 41 S safety warnings 4 saving configuration 57 Secure Shell See SSH service access control 210 service port 211 Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier 165 Service Provider s Network 163 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 200 agent 200 and MIB 200 communities 202 management model 200 manager 200 MIB 201 network components 200 object variables 200 protocol operations 200 setup 202 traps 201 versions supported 200 SNMP traps 201 SP TPID 165 Spanning Tree Protocol STP 107 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 160 SSH encryption methods 205 how it works 204 implementation 205 SSH Secure Shell 204 SSL Secure Socket Layer 206 standby ports 131 static MAC address 33 103 static MAC forwarding 95 103 static routes 185 cost of transmission 185 TCP IP parameters 185 static VLAN 90 control 92 tagging 92 status 52 LED 49 link aggregation 133
119. Scripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 311 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 121 Internet Options i General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings amp o e Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites This zone contains all Web sites you Gres haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional aT Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites TT C Custom Level D Default Level n 6 OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default 6 Click OK to close the window 312 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 122 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings A34 xl Settings Scripting 3 Active scripting O Disable e O Prompt 3 Allow paste operations via script O Disable Enable O Prompt 3 Scripting of Java app
120. Summary User Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt IP host name gt vlan Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device in the 0 lt vlan id gt specified VLAN s with the specified parameters size lt 0 1472 gt t help Displays command help information 0 tracerout lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet takes to a device 0 e lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet takes to a device ina 0 vlan lt vlan id gt VLAN tt1 lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt help Displays command help information 0 ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH O ip gt version 34 11 2 Enable Mode The following table describes the commands available for Enable mode Table 83 Command Summary Enable Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE help Displays help information 13 logout Exits Enable or privileged mode 13 exit Exits Enable or privileged mode 13 history Displays a list of command s that 13 you have previously executed enable Accesses Enable or privileged 13 mode disable Exits Enable or privileged mode 13 configure Accesses Configuration mode 13 See Section 34 11 3 on page 246 stk port Tests stack port list 13 test no logging Clears system logs 13 arp Flushes the ARP Address 13 Resolution Protocol table interface lt port C
121. TELEPHONE WEB SITE SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE REGULAR MAIL support zyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 NORWAY sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway info pl zyxel com 48 22 333 8250 www pl zyxel com ZyXEL Communications POLAND ul Okrzei 1A 48 22 333 8251 03 715 Warszawa Poland http zyxel ru support 7 095 542 89 29 www zyxel ru ZyXEL Russia RUSSIA Ostrovityanova 37a Str sales zyxel ru 7 095 542 89 25 Moscow 117279 Russia support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications SPAIN Arte 21 5 planta sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 28033 Madrid Spain support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S SWEDEN Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg sales zyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Sweden support ua zyxel com 380 44 247 69 78 www ua zyxel com ZyXEL Ukraine UKRAINE 13 Pimonenko Str sales ua zyxel com 380 44 494 49 32 Kiev 04050 Ukraine UNITED KINGDOM support zyxel co uk 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only www zyxel co uk sales zyxel co uk 44 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK is the prefix number you enter to make an international telephone call Customer Support ES 3124 User s Guide Table of Contents Copyrights sc
122. Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 44 Common IP Ports PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 18 4 Classifier Example The following figure shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 Chapter 18 Classifier 151 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 63 Classifier Example Ii Active iv Name Packet Format All VLAN Priority Ethernet Type Layer 2 Source Destination DSCP IP Protocol Layer 3 Source Destination Exemple X Any C Any o iP 33 others Hex Any MAC Address C macfoo 50 l la ed ar far Port Ten MAC Add SS ress Snel LL E ML LE TI G Any c o all y I Establish Only C Others Dec IP Address 00 08 iL Address Prefix Any e poo ud Any el 7 Socket Number IP Address Address Prefix Socket Number Ade Cancel Clear 152 Chapter 18 Classifier ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules 19 1 Policy Rules Overview A
123. VID Action Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 21 Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification purpose only Chapter 10 Filtering 105 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 21 Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save this rule to the the switch s run time memory The switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click C
124. VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 8 on page 85 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 11 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows
125. VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 163 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 68 VLAN Stacking Example A VLAN 24 4 N A 37 24 B 48 24 Nona Nice VLAN 24 VLAN 24 B 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a
126. Vv MEME ea tea ter fea fea Te Pea RIBEIRA gt gt gt ebbi gt 2 gt ebbe gt gt gt bb gt gt gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt gt gt 33 33 gt gt gt gt 3 MAS SSA BSAS SS MS ASAS AS Ribble SS ASA SAS SS gt o gt gt RIRIBIBIR e gt gt gt gt RIERA gt gt gt gt BIRR gt v pes ne m rer ee tala estatal s Eng ym E Outgoing 9 99 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 42 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Portisolation Setting Wizard 10 111 1 12 113 114 15 1 16 12 18 197 20 21 22 23 94 23 2651 22128 S m DO O O O s E E E r n O O O O r r r E E n 21 PIF FIF iv v iv eru iv Door We 111192 PAS PAS 1 35 Ple 112 118 110 20 2152 23 2 1 25 20 271 29 aa Ss 0g Coo OC ODDIE 000000000 oe oo oD Lou ODD ooo CODD ooo coco a i c cc a a a a De SS e ES ee oe BD oc a AS a a m DODO O AS Aa 00 0 a A a fs A OOD co cle CODE o ooo a fs KUO oO ORE coo io oD oo oo a a a S Lio Uo ODDIE Ce clic CDE cio oo op a SOS cc c C as mamm a eS DDD E a a a a coc OOOO o S a a a a a ea af ES a AS a a a cio oo ope S ODD oo ci CDE Lode Lie oo CORD coo cic CODE cic oo a a S Poe Be ee Be ee CODO 5 mamen omn o a 8 fl iz A SL 533885384 aja 9 Chapter 8 VLAN 100 ES 3124 User s Guide The fo
127. a list of recently used commands available to you for reuse You can use any commands in the history again by pressing the up 4 or down arrow key to scroll through the previously used commands and press ENTER Use the history command to display the list of commands ras gt history enable exit show ip history ras gt 34 10 Saving Your Configuration 34 10 1 After you set the switch settings with the configuration commands use the write memory command to save the changes permanently Note The write memory command is not available in User mode You must save your changes after each CLI session All unsaved configuration changes are lost once you restart the switch rast write memory Switch Configuration File When you configure the switch using either the CLI Command Line Interface or web configurator the settings are saved as a series of commands in a configuration file on the switch You can perform the following with a configuration file Back up switch configuration once the switch is set up to work in your network Restore switch configuration Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 239 ES 3124 User s Guide Use the same configuration file to set all switches of the same model in your network to the same settings Note You may also edit a configuration file using a text editor Make sure you use valid commands The switch rejects configuration files with invalid or
128. a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or remark the Profile DSCP number for out of profile traffic DSCP Action Specify the action s the switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Chapter 19 Policy Rule 155 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 45 Policy continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Sele
129. able screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address 1s dynamic learned by the switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table Ifthe switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port e Ifthe switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion Ifthe switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 112 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this frame Forward to outgoing port Chapter 31 MAC Table 227 ES 3124 User s Guide 31 2 Viewing the M
130. adcast Starm Control i wironing Configure Clone Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast DHCP Relay Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 53 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup VLAN Status VLAN Port Setting Protocol Based VLAN Static VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Status Configuration Link Aggregation Status Configuration Port Authentication RADIUS 802 1x Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast Multicast Status Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile MVR DHCP Relay DiffServ DiffServ Setting DSCP Setting ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION ROUTING PROTOCOL MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Load Factory Default Reboot System Access Control SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Diagnostic Syslog Setup Server Setup Cluster Management Status Configuration MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone 54 Chapter 4 The
131. added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the settings to the switch Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 174 Chapter 22 Multicast ES 3124 User s Guide 22 5 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider n
132. ali d 1 Hle n c 2 iS RI EE MOT LIP a di ALU aaa 6 Customer sboccia 7 Table oT COn a 9 List of FIGHEGS uoo iri ope xii LONE ci alien 21 Eist f DATOS ETC 25 La o o CO ROTA On 5 A 29 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ii 31 Ci dica 31 1 2 Solare PEQUES rana Riina 31 TS Hardware POSUISSE in iaia 35 140 30 35 TA Backbone ARI ll 36 lidi EA asia aaa eh 36 1 4 3 High Performance Switched Example ccccccccceeeessecsseeeessceeteeeesseeees 37 1 4 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples sss 37 1 4 4 1 Tag basen VLAN Example ca 38 1 4 4 2 VLAN Shared Server Example nne 38 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and ConnectiON ooocconccnncnnncnnncocnccnncnncnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 41 2 1 Freestanding Installation urli ea 41 2 2 Mounting the Swich on a RACK asc 42 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements sss 42 Fam NIIS D tem 42 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch ssssssss 42 22 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 2 rceese kien cil ook iii 42 Table of Contents 9 ES 3124 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Deu e Wr eia cisci A ai 45 21 PARCIOGRISGIONE e tcr TN 45 211 1 Console PON c 46 AL lA E EEA 46 41 21 Defaut Ethemet Seu id 46 dla MIHIEGBIO SII cacao 47 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation
133. ally entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen 230 Chapter 32 ARP Table ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 33 Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 33 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 115 Configure Clone ES Configure Clone 3 Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Basic Setting Intrusion Lock VLANI VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol based VLAN Port based VLAN Apply Cancel Advanced Application C1 DI EIL EI FILET CIL EJ FILET EL EI CI CEEED EI CI E CHI Chapter 33 Configure Clone 231 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports Port which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports
134. ancel Clear IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Syslog Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Se
135. ancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification Address number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN identification number Action This field displays the filtering action Discard both Discard source or Discard dest Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column 106 Chapter 10 Filtering ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Spanning Tree Protocol The switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP as defined in the following standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol e IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol The switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 11 4 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with othe
136. ands The User mode command prompt ends with an angle bracket gt To enter Enable mode type enable and enter the administrator password when prompted the default is 1234 When you enter Enable mode the command prompt changes to the pound sign If you log into the command interpreter as an administrator you automatically enter Enable mode The following table describes command interpreter modes and how to access them Table 81 Command Interpreter Mode Summary HOW TO LOGIN MODE DESCRIPTION ACCESS PROMPT User Commands available in this mode are Default login level fora ras gt a subset of enable mode You can read only account perform basic tests and display general system information Enable Commands available in this mode Default login level for rast allow you to save configuration accounts with a settings reset configuration settings privilege of 13 or 14 as well as display further system Read only accounts information This mode also contains with a privilege of 0 the configure command which 12 need to type the takes you to config mode enable command and enter enable mode password 236 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 81 Command Interpreter Mode Summary continued MODE DESCRIPTION HOW TO LOGIN ACCESS PROMPT Config Commands available in this mode allow you to configure settings that affect the switch globally
137. annel 1 3 5 ras config interface 37 2 2 bpdu control Syntax bpdu control lt peer tunnel discard network gt Chapter 37 Interface Commands 289 ES 3124 User s Guide where lt peer tunnel discard Type peer to process any BPDUs received on these ports network Type tunnel to forward BPDUS received on these ports Type discard to drop any BPDUS received on these ports Type network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU An example is shown next Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration Set the BPDU control to tunnel to forward BPDUs received on ports one three four and five ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface bpdu control tunnel ras config interface 37 2 3 broadcast limit Syntax broadcast limit broadcast limit pkt s where Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch lt pkt s gt Limits how many broadcast packet the interface receives per second An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Enable broadcast control Set how many broadband packets the interface receives per second ras config interface port channel 1 ras config interface broadcast limit ras config interface broadcast limit 21 37 2 4 bandwidth limit The bandwidth limit command enables bandwidth control on the switch 290 Chapter 37 Interface Commands ES 3124 User s Guide
138. ar Error Log y n prompt you cannot view it again 35 2 4 show interface Syntax show interface port number 268 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide This command displays statistics of a port The following example shows that port 2 is up and the related information Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collison Error Packet Distribution rast rasf show interface 2 Port NO Link Status LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time Tx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Tagged Rx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Control Single ultiple Excessive Late RX CRC Length Runt 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant o o o o NF 4 o oo oo oo ooo co ao aooo o oo oo o oo 2 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 0 163 102333 Co Co A A 35 2 5 show mac address table Syntax show mac address table lt all lt sort gt static gt Where lt sort gt Specifies the sorting criteria MAC VID or port Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands 269 ES 3124 User s Guide This command displays the MAC address es stored in the switch The following example shows the static MAC address table ras show mac address table static Port VLAN ID MAC Address Type CPU 1 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 Static rast 35 3 ping Syntax ping lt ip host name gt lt in ban
139. arding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies Chapter 19 Policy Rule 153 ES 3124 User s Guide 19 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 18 2 on page 147 for more information Click Advanced Applications and then Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 64 Policy Policy Active O Name Example Classifier s General Metering VLAN ID Bandwidth Kbps of Profi Egress Port pata one fe Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port Tag C Untag Priority 0 y DSCP TOS 0 y Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Sendthe packetto priority queue Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change C Setthe packet s TOS field Action C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packet to the mirror port Sendthe packetto the egress port Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping orto be
140. asis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 107 for more information 112 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 3124 User s Guide Table 25 RSTP Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 11 4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the switch Figure 48 Rapid Spanning Tree Pr
141. ast ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 77 MVR Configuration Example A II Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 200 802 1p Priority fox Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging x O 1 I O O 2 C Ce DL 3 O Lol O D 4 O Cc ce C 5 e rH 6 O O e D 7 e O 8 e e e O 9 O O Io O 10 C C a r 11 C C d m 12 O O e LH 13 C C d r 14 O O e LH 15 C C 3 r AAA 17 C O D 18 C C e r 19 O C d m 20 C C d i 21 O O c O 22 C C d r 23 C O d r 24 O C d r 25 C O d m 26 C O d r 2 C O d m 28 C e O Ade Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel To set the switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Chapter 22 Multicast 181 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 78 MVR Group Configuration Example iguration Multicast VLAN ID 200 lt rs Start Address 241 410 End Address 2241 4 50 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 3 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 O Delete Cancel Figure 79 MVR Group Configuration Example Aa Configuration MVR
142. ation 131 ES 3124 User s Guide 15 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 32 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 33 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 15 3 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Click Advanced Application Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen displays by default See Section 15 1 on page 131 for more information Figure 54 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Configuration Index Aggregator ID Enabled Ports Synchronized Ports 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 1 d 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 4 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 4 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 C000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 g 0900 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the indivi
143. ature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status MAC 35 5 35 5 26 5 85 0 Norma CPU 33 0 33 0 25 0 85 0 Norma PHY 31 0 31 0 25 0 85 0 Norma FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 5908 5933 5716 2750 Norma FAN2 5715 5810 5625 2750 Norma FAN3 5716 5763 5536 2750 Norma Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status VCOREA 2 528 2 528 2 512 10 Norma VINRO 1 248 1 248 1 248 10 Norma 3 3VIN 3 312 3 312 3 312 8 Norma 12VIN 11 977 11 977 11 916 11 Norma 1 3VIN 1 312 1312 1 312 i 1096 Norma 1 25VIN 1 232 1 232 1 232 8 Norma 1 8VIN 1 824 1 824 1 824 10 Norma BPS 12VIN Absent The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the switch for identification purposes ZyNOS FW This field displays the version number of the switch s current firmware including the Version date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the switch Address Hardware Monitor Temperature The switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature MAC CPU and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the switch printed circuit board Current This field d
144. bes the labels in this screen Table 17 VLAN VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch Port Isolation Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port but not communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the device discards incoming frames for VLANS that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Frame Type Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only and Untag Only Select All from the drop down list box to ac
145. bles IGMP immediate leave on 13 leave the port igmp filtering Disables IGMP filtering on the port 13 profile igmp group Disables IGMP group limitation 13 limited ingress check Disables ingress checking on the 13 port s gvrp Disable GVRP on the port s 13 flow control Disables flow control on the port s 13 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 261 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 85 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE vlan trunking Disables VLAN trunking on the 13 port s mirror Disables port mirroring on the 13 port s bandwidth limit Disables bandwidth limit on the 13 port s broadcast limit Disables broadcast storm control 13 limit on the switch multicast limit Disables multicast limit on the 13 Switch dlf limit Disables destination lookup failure 13 DLF limit on the switch inactive Enables the port s on the switch 13 intrusion lock Disables intrusion lock on a port so 13 that a port can be connected again after you disconnected the cable inactive Disables the specified port s on 13 the switch help Displays a description of the 13 interface port channel commands vlan stacking Sets the VLAN stacking port roles 13 role of the specified interface normal access tunnel vlan stacking Sets the service provider VID of 13 SPVID 1 4094 the specified interface vlan stacki
146. cast VLANs DHCP Relay This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DHCP relay information and specify the DHCP server s Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 55 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Routing Protocol Static Routing This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can configure DiffServ and DSCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management Management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address r
147. ccount For example if your login account has a privilege level of 12 you can use all commands with privilege levels from 0 to 12 0 privilege level commands are available to all login accounts Note If you use an external RADIUS server to authenticate users you can use a VSA Vendor Specific Attribute to configure a privilege level for an account on the RADIUS server See Section 16 1 1 1 on page 115 for more information Use the following commands to specify privilege levels for login accounts Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 235 ES 3124 User s Guide Syntax logins username username password password logins username username privilege 0 14 where username username Specifies a new user up to 32 alphanumeric characters Enter a user name to change the settings of an existing account password password Specifies the new password up to 32 alphanumeric characters for this user privilege 0 14 Assigns a privilege level for the user 34 7 Command Modes There are three command modes User Enable and Configure The modes and commands available to you depend on what level of privilege your account has See Section 34 6 on page 235 for more information on setting up privilege levels When you first log into the command interpreter with a read only account having a privilege of 0 to 12 the initial mode is the User mode The User mode commands are a subset of Enable mode comm
148. cept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 94 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide 8 6 Protocol Based VLANS Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN For e
149. classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 18 on page 147 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 19 1 1 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forw
150. cluding the password Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details Your computer s and the switch s IP addresses must be on the same subnet See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 307 ES 3124 User s Guide 40 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 40 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 40 2 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 117 Pop up Blocker Mail and News gt Pop up Blocker Turn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Settings Synchronize VIAS Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can als
151. cs ES 3124 User s Guide Table 6 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports 6 1 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the switch Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 67 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 26 Status Port Details Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution LE PortDetails 7 Port Status Port NO 11 Name Link Down Status FORWARDING LACP Disabled TxPkts 684 RxPkts 477 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 0 07 42 TX Packets 684 Multicast 1 Broadcast 0 Pause 523 Tagged 0 RX Packets 518 Multicast 18 Broadcast 0 Pause 0 Control 0 Single 0 Multiple 827847 Excessive 0 Late 0 RX CRC 0 Length 0 Runt 0 64 519 65 to 127 38 128 to 255 59 256 to 511 135 512t01023 30 1024 to 1518 522 Giant 0 The follow
152. ct Replace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Select Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU to the egress port to send the broadcast multicast DLF marked to drop or CPU frames to the egress port Select Set the packet s VLAN ID to set the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you configure in the VLAN ID field Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic action Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below Cance
153. cz zyxel com 420 241 091 350 info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 359 www zyxel cz ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modranska 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika support zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej DENMARK sales zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark support zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy FINLAND a Malminkaari 10 sales zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki Finland info zyxel fr 33 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers FRANCE 33 4 72 52 19 20 Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH GERMANY Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany support zyxel hu 36 1 3361649 www zyxel hu ZyXEL Hungary HUNGARY 48 Zoldlomb Str info zyxel hu 36 1 3259100 H 1025 Budapest Hungary http zyxel kz support 7 3272 590 698 www zyxel kz ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk ave Office 414 KAZAKHSTAN sales zyxel kz 7 3272 590 689 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St NORTH AMERICA Anaheim sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com O Customer Support ES 3124 User s Guide METHOD LOCATION SUPPORT E MAIL
154. d 23 Normal C Fixed Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging uos can receive Irames 24 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v Tx Tagging 1 1 th TX T A 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging proper y clear e agging 26 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging check box to set the switch to 27 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 28 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging remove VLAN tags before sending Add Cancel Clear Click Add to save the settings to h S VID Active Name Delete the run time memory Settings In 1 ER 1 r the run time memory are lost when the ES 3124 s power is Delete Cancel turned off 62 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example ES 3124 User s Guide 5 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 10 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID e T oe ASA de si L 1 Click Advanced Applications VLAN P Setting Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status and VLAN in the navigation Grp r panel Then click the VLAN Beeren s Port Setting link Port IngressCheck PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking 1 r fT io far D 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for 2 O_O o r port 10 and click Apply to A
155. d 6 for configuration Enable port mirroring on the ports Enable port mirroring for outgoing traffic Traffic is copied from ports 1 4 5 and 6 to port three in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original ports ras config mirror port ras config mirror port 3 ras config interface port channel 1 4 6 ras config interface mirror ras config interface mirror dir egress 37 2 6 gvrp Syntax gvrp GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch An example is shown next Enable the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN command to configure tagged VLAN for the switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable GVRP on the interface ras config vlanlq gvrp ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface gvrp 37 2 7 ingress check The ingress check command enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member Syntax ingress check An example is shown next Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration 292 Chapter 37 Interface Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Enable ingress checking on the interface ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface ingress
156. d out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size lt 0 1472 gt t where lt ip host name gt The IP address or host name of an Ethernet device in band out of Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the DondIsvTancwbancics Ethernet device belongs out of band refers to the management port while in band means the other ports on the switch size 0 1472 Specifies the packet size to send ste Sends Ping packets to the Ethernet device indefinitely Press CTRL C to terminate the Ping process This command sends Ping packets to an Ethernet device The following example sends Ping requests to and displays the replies from an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 ras ping 192 168 1 100 sent rcvd rate rtt avg mdev max min reply from 1 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 2 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 3 3 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 ras 35 4 traceroute Syntax traceroute lt ip host name gt in band out of band vlan vlan id gt ttl lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt 270 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide where lt ip host name gt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt ttl lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt The IP address or host name of an Ethernet device Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the Ethernet device belongs Specifies the Time T
157. ddress Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address 1s 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 32 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the switch the switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 32 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the f
158. de Back up your current switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 89 Backup Configuration DETTO Nr Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 26 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 26 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password switch setup IP Setup etc Once you have customized the switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 62 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config This is the configuration filenam
159. direct console connection or Telnet to access the command interpreter on the switch Note The switch automatically logs you out of the management interface after five minutes of inactivity If this happens to you simply log back in again By default multiple command interpreter management session are allowed via either the console port or Telnet However no more than five concurrent login sessions are allowed e Use the configure multi login command in the configuration mode to limit concurrent logins to one Console port access has higher priority 34 2 1 The Console Port Connect to the switch s console port using a terminal emulation software configured to the following settings VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits e 1 stop bit No flow control Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 233 ES 3124 User s Guide 34 2 1 1 Initial Screen When you turn on your switch it performs several internal tests as well as line initialization You can view the initialization information using the console port After the initialization the login screen displays refer to Section 34 3 on page 234 Copyright c 1994 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp initialize mgmt ethernet address 00 13 49 00 00 01 initialize switch ethernet address 00 13 49 00 00 02 Initializing switch unit 0 Initializing VLAN Database Initializing IP Interface Initializing Advanced Applications Initializing
160. ds 184 Chapter 23 DHCP Relay ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 24 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 24 1 Configuring Static Route Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Click IP Application Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 81 Static Routing a Static Routing J Active Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address r pee 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pes Metric Add Cancel Clear index Active Name Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Metric Delete 1 Yes example 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 2 F Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 58 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Chapter 24 Static Route 185 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 58 Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask fie
161. ds in the IP Setup screen For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask 5 n the VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 6 Select the Manageable check box to allow the switch to be managed from the ports belonging to VLAN2 using this specified IP address Click Add to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the ES 3124 s power is turned off IP Setup Domain Name Server Default Management In band Management IP Address Out of band Management IP Address 0 0 0 0 in band C Out of band C DHCP Client Static IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway VID 1 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Apply Cancel band IP Addresses IP Address 192 168 2 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 MID 2 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Manageable iv Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Manageable Delete Delete Cancel 64 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 6 System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 6
162. dual port 132 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 15 2 1 on page 132 for more information on this field Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk Ports group 15 4 Link Aggregation Setup Click Configuration in the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen to display the screen shown next See Section 15 1 on page 131 for more information on link aggregation Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 133 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 55 Link Aggregation Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol Active System Priority r 65535 Apply Group ID Active Dynamic LACP Ti O O T2 r1 O Ta Ci E T4 C o T5 Ci n T6 r rH Port Group LACP Timeout 5 E seconds 1 None y 30 Y seconds 2 None 30 seconds 3 None 30 v seconds 4 None 30 seconds 5 None gt 30 seconds 6 Non
163. e Preface 29 ES 3124 User s Guide Graphics Icons Key m NS A ES 3124 Computer Server Uc Ne z AUI Computer DSLAM Gateway Central Office ISP EN p gr E Internet YA Mad Hub Switch User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you 30 Preface ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the switch 1 1 Introduction The ES 3124 is a stand alone layer 3 Ethernet switch with 24 10 100Mbps ports two RJ 45 Gigabit ports for stacking and 2 dual personality interfaces for uplink as well as a console port and a management port for local management A dual personality interface includes one Gigabit port and one slot for mini GBIC transceiver SFP module with one port active at a time With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the switch is easy In addition the switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management 1 2 Software Features This section describes the general software features of the switch DHCP Client DHCP
164. e due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be E5 3148 00a0c5012345 possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identifying the Web site ES 3148 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site ok cane tep Figure 99 Security Certificate 2 Netscape x You have attempted to establish a connection with 192 168 1 1 However the security certificate presented belongs to ES 3148 00a0c5012345 It is possible though unlikely that someone may be trying to intercept your communication with this web site If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help 27 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection 208 Chapter 27 Access Control ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 100 Login Screen Internet Explorer Web Configurator Mic
165. e name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch 30 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen Chapter 30 Cluster Management 223 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 111 Clustering Management Configuration List Password EE Clustering Management Configuration Status Clustering Manager Active Iv Name Master Clustering Candidate VID fi Apply Cancel 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 MM Index Add Cancel Refresh MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Clustering Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name
166. e number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights FE Port SPQ Enable This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue Q0 to Q7 to have the switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports For example if you select Q5 the switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports Port This label shows the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights GE Port SPQ Enable This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue Q0 to Q7 to have the switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the gigabit ports For example if you select Q5 the switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using Strictly Priority Select None to always use WFQ or WR
167. e on the switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the switch Chapter 26 Maintenance 195 ES 3124 User s Guide 26 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the switch ftp get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Note Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 26 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firm
168. e radius server command to set up your RADIUS server settings Syntax radius server host lt index gt lt ip gt radius server host lt index gt lt ip gt acct port lt socket number gt key lt key string gt radius server timeout lt 1 1000 gt radius server mode lt priority round robin gt where radius server host index Specifies the IP address of the RADIUS server lt ip gt acct port lt socket number gt Changes the UDP port of the RADIUS server from the default 1812 key lt key string gt Specifies a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the RADIUS server and the switch Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 285 ES 3124 User s Guide radius server timeout lt 1 1000 mode lt priority round robin gt Specifies the timout period in seconds the switch will wait for a response from a RADIUS server If 2 RADIUS servers are configured this is the total time the switch will wait for a response from either server Specifies the way the switch will process requests from the clients to the RADIUS server Only applicable with multiple RADIUS servers configured priority When a client sends an authentication request through the switch to the RADIUS server The switch will forward the request to the RADIUS server If no response within half the timeout period it will forward the request to the second RADIUS server round robin When a client se
169. e y 30 seconds 7 None 30 v seconds 8 None 30 seconds 9 None 30 seconds 10 None y 30 seconds 11 None y 30 Y seconds 12 None 30 seconds 13 None 30 seconds 14 None 30 seconds 15 None y 30 seconds 16 None y 30 seconds 17 None 30 seconds 18 None 30 seconds 19 None y 30 seconds 20 None 30 seconds 21 None 30 seconds 22 None 30 seconds 23 None y 30 seconds 24 None 30 seconds 25 None 30 seconds 26 None y 30 Y seconds 27 None 30 v seconds 28 None 30 3 seconds Apt Cancel 134 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Control Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest Priority system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group
170. ecifications 319 ES 3124 User s Guide 320 ES 3124 User s Guide APPENDIX B IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses IP address classes and subnet masks You use subnet masks to subdivide a network into smaller logical networks Introduction to IP Addresses An IP address has two parts the network number and the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID identifies a single device on the network An IP address is made up of four octets written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 An octet is an 8 digit binary number Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal There are several classes of IP addresses The first network number 192 in the above example defines the class of IP address These are defined as follows Class A 0 to 127 Class B 128 to 191 Class C 192 to 223 Class D 224 to 239 Class E 240 to 255 IP Address Classes and Hosts The class of an IP address determines the number of hosts you can have on your network na class A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets are the host ID Ina class B address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID e Ina class C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is
171. eed to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 212 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the switch 1s capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forwa
172. en Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Index This field displays the index number of an entry Click an index number to edit the rule IP Address This field displays the IP address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the network Default This field displays the IP address of the default outgoing gateway Gateway Manageable This field displays whether the switch can be managed using the specified IP address Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 7 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure switch port settings Click Basic Setting and then Port Setup in the navigation panel to enter the port configuration screen Full duplex mode operation only applies to point to point access for example when attaching the switch to a workstation server or another switch When connecting to hubs use a standard cascaded connection set at half duplex operation Auto negotiation regulates the speed and duplex of each port based on the capability of both devices When auto negotiation is turned on an Ethernet port on the ZyXEL switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the ZyXEL switch determines the connection speed by detecting the s
173. en as shown next 90 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 36 VLAN Static VLAN VLAN Status ACTIVE O Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal y Iv TxTagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging i Normal C Fixed C Forbidden iv TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 9 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 10 amp Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 11 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tadging 12 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 13 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden iv TxTagging 14 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 15 amp Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagaing 18 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 17 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Y Tx Tagging 18 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 19 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 20 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 21 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 22 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 23 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 24 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 26 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 27 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 28 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden
174. en web configurator access is blocked Figure 97 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or e changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid A The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed No View Certificate 27 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate 1f you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the switch s certificate into the SSL client Chapter 27 Access Control 207 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 98 Security Certificate 1 Netscape E Unable to verify the identity of ES 3148 00a0c5012345 as a trusted site Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplet
175. ent This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning SERE 1552 PARO Saleem TE 2091238 EAG TRATAR TESEO Y ASS BRA ER Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet a
176. epaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products 6 ZyXEL Limited Warranty ES 3124 User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE support zyxel com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp CORPORATE www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II HEADQUARTERS Science Park WORLDWIDE sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com Hsinchu 300 ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan soporte zyxel co cr 506 2017878 WWW Zyxel co cr ZyXEL Costa Rica COSTA RICA Plaza Roble Escaz sales zyxel co cr 506 2015098 ftp zyxel co cr Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica CZECH REPUBLIC info
177. er 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 MRSTP Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 48 on page 113 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for
178. er 27 Access Control ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 28 Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 28 1 Diagnostic Click Management Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 104 Diagnostic LO Diagnostic NN Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful H System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Pont 1 Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test Chapter 28 Diagnostic 213 ES 3124 User s Guide 214 Chapter 28 Diagnostic ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 29 Syslog This chapter explains the syslog screens 29 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messag
179. er optic module s connectors 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example SSL 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 47 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 11 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 13 Transceiver Removal Example RES 3 2 Rear Panel The following figure shows the rear panel of the ES 3124 The rear panel contains the ventilation holes a connector for external backup power supply BPS and the power receptacle 48 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 14 Rear Panel 3 2 1 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel To connect the power to the switch insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to the power source Make sure that no object
180. es A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 71 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message NI OO oO BR wl N oOo Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 29 2 Syslog Setup Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Chapter 29 Syslog 215 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 105 Syslog a Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active IT Logging type Active Facility System O local use 0 y Interface O local use 0 Switch Dn local
181. esolution table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can clone port attributes of a port and transfer them to other port s 4 4 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management Access Control and then Logins to display the next screen 56 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password Access Control dministrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm fricrr r o rel titre I I I IN INN UM TA A AM PRE Apply Cancel 4 5 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the ES 3124 s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the ES 3124 s storage that remains even if the ES 3124 s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 6 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from access
182. ess VID IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway np IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway fi 92 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 fi 92 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 2004 conca In band IP Addresses IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Manageable Index IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Manageable Delete Delete Cancel Chapter 7 Basic Setting 79 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP Name Server address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the switch is to send packets Management originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the switch send the packets to the out of band management port This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select In Band to have the switch send the packets to all ports except the out of band management port to which connected device s do not receive these packets In band Management IP Address DHCP Client Select this option i
183. ets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size 70 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 7 Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 7 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your switch The real time is then displayed in the switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a switch IP address subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes 7 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting and System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen Chapter 7 Basic Setting 71 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 27 System Info a PETIT System Name ES 3124 ZyNOS FAW Version 3 70 TP 0 b0 4 28 2006 Ethernet Address 00 13 49 6a d1 87 Hardware Monitor Temperature unit c Temper
184. etwork MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management You must enable IGMP snooping to use MVR However MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the switch and S Figure 72 MVR Network Example 22 5 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast data Once configured the switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 22 5 2 MVR Modes You can set your switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This a
185. eul sn air 101 Table 20 Static MAC Forwarding oil 104 IC ecc Rane ener ne ety err opener ee Pre 105 Table 22 SITP Pali Cost silla 107 Tobhle 23 SIF POI SS liceali ala 108 Table 24 Spanning Tree Protocol Status sacra 110 Table 25 ROT P BUE N sila lia TIZ Table 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status 113 Table 27 MRSTP Conf gl BUDE ricalca 116 Table 2B Spanning Tree Protocol Status site 117 Table acp Ego at 120 Table 30 Broadcast Storm COMOL src ss 125 E mad dcum TUUM 129 Table 32 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch icaro Lira 132 Table 33 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch ale o EE tdi 132 Table 34 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status ssssssssss 133 Table 35 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration 135 Table 36 DUDDOITEH VSA sortida 138 Table 37 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute 138 Table 38 Port Authentication RADIUS ica 139 List of Tables 25 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 39 Port Authentication BUS TK seri e IERI E npe EP E EE n din 142 Tople dom dos l 144 IO IIR IUD s 148 Table 42 Classifier Summary Table oi ii 150 Table 43 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number 150 IE Or CXesnnueaIicu dM 151 IE de s pev 155 Table 45 Polley Summary Table ela 157 Table 47 Oueuing Method Label aaa 162 E roRE VEL dee T ET 164 Table 49 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format
186. f you have a DHCP server that can assign the switch an IP address subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address automatically Static IP Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP Address address information to the switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Address Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 1 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the switch IP address VID is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port cannot access the device To access the switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Out of band M anagement IP Address IP Address Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 0 1 If you change this IP address make sure the computer connected to this management port is in the same subnet before accessing the switch
187. feet 41 interfaces IP 78 IP interface 78 IP setup 78 iStacking 33 L LACP 131 System priority 135 timeout 135 LEDs 49 lights 49 limit MAC address learning 145 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 131 link aggregation 32 131 dynamic 131 ID information 132 setup 133 status 133 link aggregation See also trunking 32 lockout 57 log 213 login 51 password 56 web configurator 51 login account Administrator 202 non administrator 203 login accounts 202 configuring via web configurator 202 multiple 202 number of 202 login password 203 MAC Media Access Control 72 MAC address 72 229 maximum number per port 145 MAC address learning 33 76 95 103 145 specify limit 145 MAC table 227 how it works 227 viewing 228 maintenance 191 current configuration 191 main screen 191 Index 331 ES 3124 User s Guide management port 45 Management Information Base MIB 200 management interface See also CLI management port 101 MIB and SNMP 200 supported MIBs 201 MIB Management Information Base 200 mini GBIC ports 47 connection speed 47 connector types 47 transceiver installation 47 transceiver removal 48 mirroring ports 127 modes and accounts 236 in command interpreter 236 mounting brackets 42 MSA MultiSource Agreement 47 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 75 multicast 169 multicast group 173 multicast settings 172 multicast VLAN 179 multicasting 802 1 priority 172 addresses 169 setup 170 Multiple Spanning Tree
188. field Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Role Select Normal to have the switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored Select Access Port to have the switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 8 on page 85 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority On the switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the
189. for more information Table 37 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Type 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the switch 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate IEEE802 1x security both on the switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings 138 Chapter 16 Port Authentication ES 3124 User s Guide Click Advanced Application Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 57 Port Authentication Port Authentication ____ Click here Click here 16 2 1 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 16 1 1 on page 137 for more information on RADIUS servers From the Port Authentication screen click RADIUS to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 58 Port Authentication RADIUS AN nus END Port Authentication Authentication Server IP Address D 0 0 0 UDP Port 1812 Shared Secret 1234 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Port Authentication RADIUS LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation
190. for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on Guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows Queue Weight Total Queue Weight x Port Speed For example using the default setting Q0 on Port 1 gets a guaranteed bandwidth of 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x 100 Mbps 3 Mbps Chapter 20 Queuing Method 159 ES 3124 User s Guide 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Applicatio
191. for a response from the RADIUS server Enable port authentication on ports 4 to12 Activate reauthentication on the ports Specify 1800 seconds as the interval for client reauthentication ras config radius server host 1 10 10 10 1 acct port 1890 key secretKey ras config radius server timeout 30 ras config port access authenticator ras config port access authenticator 4 12 ras config port access authenticator 4 12 reauthenticate ras config port access authenticator 4 12 reauth period 1800 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 287 ES 3124 User s Guide 288 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 37 Interface Commands These are some commonly used configuration commands that belong to the interface group of commands 37 1 Overview The interface commands allow you to configure the switch on a port by port basis 37 2 Interface Command Examples This section provides examples of some frequently used interface commands 37 2 1 interface port channel Use this command to enable the specified ports for configuration Indicate multiple non sequential ports separated by a comma Use a dash to specify a port range Syntax interface port channel lt port list gt An example is shown next Enter the configuration mode Enable ports 1 3 4 and 5 for configuration Begin configuring for those ports rast config ras config interface port ch
192. g where igmp snooping host timeout lt 1 16711450 gt leave timeout 1 16711450 unknown multicast frame lt drop flooding gt reserved multicast group lt drop flooding gt An example is shown next host timeout lt 1 16711450 gt leave timeout lt 1 16711450 gt unknown multicast frame lt drop flooding gt reserved multicast group drop flooding Enables IGMP snooping on the switch Specifies the time out period of the switch with respect to IGMP report queries If an IGMP report for a multicast group was not received for a host timeout period from a specific port this port is deleted from the member list of that multicast group Specifies the time that the switch will wait for multicast members to respond to a leave report If no response happens in the timeout period the switch deletes the port from the multicast group Specifies whether you want to discard packets from unknown multicast groups or whether you want to forward them to all ports Specifies whether you want to discard packets in the reserved multicast groups or whether you want to forward them to all ports Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 275 ES 3124 User s Guide Enable IGMP snooping on the switch Setthehost timeout and leave timeout values to 30 seconds Setthe switch to drop packets from unknown multicast groups ras config igmp snooping ras f igmp snooping host timeout 30 ras config i
193. ges to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 22 4 IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups This allows you to have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service like a SIP server for example Within a profile configure an IGMP filter to specify the multicast IP address ranges Then assign the IGMP filter profile to the ports in the Multicast Setting screen that are allowed to use the service Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Chapter 22 Multicast 173 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 71 Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Add Clear Profile Name Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule Default O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already
194. gh that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 107 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in 116 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 3124 User s Guide Table 27 MRSTP Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 11 6 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 107 for more information on MRSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the switch Figure 50 MRSTP Status Tree is _ Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 0013496ad187 8000 0013496ad187 Hello Time second 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 11 The following table describes the labels in this screen
195. given to each variable from wt 1 to wt 8 egress set Sets the outgoing traffic port list for 13 lt port list gt a port based VLAN igmp immediate Enables IGMP immediate leave on 13 leave the port igmp filtering Sets the IGMP filtering profile for 13 profile name this port igmp group Limits the number of multicast 13 limited groups igmp group Sets the number of multicast 13 limited number groups this port is allowed to join number igmp querier Sets the IGMP querier mode ofa 13 mode port auto fixed edg Selects auto to treat the IGMP e queries normally fixed to always treat the port as a querier port no matter there is a query or edge to treat the port as a non querier port which drops any IGMP queries received Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 259 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 85 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE pvid lt 1 4094 gt The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports Sets a PVID in the range 1 to 4094 for the specified interface 13 ingress check Enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port member set gvrp Enables this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch frame type agged all tagged unt Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port name port name st
196. gmp snooping leave timeout 30 ras config igmp snooping unknown multicast frame drop config 36 2 Configure IGMP Filter Use the following commands in the config mode to configure IGMP filtering profiles Syntax igmp filtering igmp filtering profile name start address ip end address ip where igmpfiltering Enables IGMP filtering on the switch profile name Specifies a name up to 32 alphanumeric characters for this IGMP profile If you want to edit an existing IGMP profile enter the existing profile name followed by start address and end address parameters start address Specifies the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile IP address in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting end address Specifies the ending multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile IP address in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting An example is shown next Enable IGMP filtering on the switch Create an IGMP filtering profile filter1 and specify the multicast IP addresses in the range 224 255 255 0 to 225 255 255 255 to belong to this profile ras config igmp filtering ras config igmp filtering profile filterl start address 224 255 255 0 end address 225 255 255 255 276 Chapter 36 Configuration M
197. gradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 20 1 1 Strictly Priority Strictly Priority SP services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 20 1 2 Weighted Fair Scheduling Weighted Fair Scheduling is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight portion the number you configure in the Weight field see Figure 18 1 when there is traffic congestion WFS is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues By default the weight for QO is 1
198. he lt port list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt e Enter normal to confirm registration ofthe lt port list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt Enter forbidden to block a lt port list gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt e Enter no fixedorno forbidden to change lt port list gt to normal status Enter untagged to send outgoing frames without a tag Enter no untagged to tag outgoing frames 38 3 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example The following example configures ports 1 to 5 as fixed and untagged ports in VLAN 2000 ras config vlan 2000 ras config vlan fixed 1 5 ras config vlan untagged 1 5 38 3 4 2 Forwarding Process Example 38 3 4 2 1 Tagged Frames 1 First the switch checks the VLAN ID VID of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames 2 The switch then checks the VID in a frame s tag against the SVLAN table Chapter 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 301 ES 3124 User s Guide 3 The switch notes what the SVLAN table says that is the SVLAN tells the switch whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags 4 Then the switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE customer premises equipment DSL device that does not accept tagged
199. he number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group Chapter 22 Multicast ES 3124 User s Guide Table 53 Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Querier Mode The switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your chan
200. he top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 8 5 on page 88 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen 92 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 37 VLAN VLAN Port Setting VLAN Status Protocol Based Vian GVRP Port isolation VLAN Trunking Acceptable Frame Type Ingress Check PVID GVRP Port LALA OPO Di 0i 00 0O 0 0O iD Di Oi Di Di Di Di Di Di Di DDD Di DiD O r E E r r E D r r D r r p r r r o r r r D r Apply Cancel SC HK wi mi miu Oir o mo Lim uoo roo oilvci10 0 wt ROMO Siei ieie ieie i eiei ieie NINNIN NEN ENE NEN 93 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide The following table descri
201. hen sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 27 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time Chapter 27 Access Control 205 ES 3124 User s Guide 27 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the switch over SSH 27 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the switch is used so that you may securely access the switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the switch whereas the SSL client onl
202. ight supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution Ifthe power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY on the motherboard IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment For detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device 4 Safety Warnings ES 3124 User s Guide This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly Safety Warnings 5 ES 3124 User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials
203. ignal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the ZyXEL switch s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the preconfigured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect Chapter 7 Basic Setting 81 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 31 Port Setup wo 2 0 0 00 00 meet Gh Mc Nini ivi ini iii iD i i i aati a jar lar il Ory 00 0 GIN Di DRM A Port Active TTT Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Pr auto y m 10 100M auto 10 100M auto zl 10 100M auo y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10100M fato y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto O y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auo y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auo y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y t10100M Auto x 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto y 10 100M auto yl 10 001000M Auc y 10 004000M Auto y 1000t000M Auto y tomnooncoom Auto y Peer ies Peer v Peer X Peer pa Peer v Peer fi Peer Peer z Peer v Peer v Peer X Peer Peer Peer Peer E Peer Peer ha dici UA Peer v 4 Peer gt Peer y Peer y Peer ze Peer Peer Peer Peer hd Peer y Peer e GA Be CRs oe O Es tds toos DECO EGEO iii
204. igure 108 Cluster Management Status Clustering Management Status g Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name Model Status 3 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 G8 2024 Online The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 109 on page 222 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offl
205. inary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 324 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting ES 3124 User s Guide Table 99 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER EAST OCIETBIT VALUE Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 100 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 27 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the subnet itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1
206. ination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 73 MVR Multicast Television Example 22 6 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the switch Your switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Chapter 22 Multicast ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 74 MVR MYR Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority fo Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None n Diao CO O Wi an amp iwinis HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO HO a w D cim n o DI 3 DI c M S DI ho ES M Nd DI ho w M p DI M3 Cn M o M A O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a gt p o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 M co Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p De
207. incomplete commands 34 10 2 Logging Out In User or Enable mode enter the exit or 1ogout command to log out of the CLI In Config mode entering exit takes you out of the Config mode and into Enable mode and entering logout logs you out of the CLI 34 11 Command Summary The following sections summarize the commands available in the switch together with a brief description of each command Commands listed in the tables are in the same order as they are displayed in the CLI See the related section in the User s Guide for more background information 34 11 14 User Mode The following table describes the commands available for User mode Table 82 Command Summary User Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE help Displays help information 0 logout Exits from the CLI 0 exit Logs out from the CLI 0 history Displays a list of previously command s that you 0 have executed The switch stores up to 256 commands in history enable Accesses Enable or privileged mode See Section 0 34 11 2 on page 241 show ip Displays IP related information 0 hardware monitor Displays current hardware monitor information with O C F the specified temperature unit Celsius C or Fahrenheit F system information Displays general system information 0 ping lt IP host name gt Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device 0 240 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 82 Command
208. ine the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 30 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Chapter 30 Cluster Management 221 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 109 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen E Status El Logout B Help c Se Member Menu Advanced Application Routing Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup Diagnostic General Setup Static MAC Forward MAC Table Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protocol ARP Table IP Setup Bandwidth Control Port Status Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation MAC Table Port Authentication ARP Table Port Security Access Control Management Maintenance Diagnostic Cluster Management 30 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example 222 Chapter 30 Cluster Management ES 3124 Use
209. ing table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Name This field shows the name of the port Link This field shows whether the Ethernet connection is down and the speed duplex mode It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 108 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP 68 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics ES 3124 User s Guide Table 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicas
210. ing the switch through the web configurator if you do one of the following 1 Deleting the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Deleting all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the switch 3 Filtering all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disabling all ports 5 Misconfiguring the text configuration file Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 57 ES 3124 User s Guide 6 Forgetting the password and or IP address 7 Preventing all services from accessing the switch 8 Changing a service port number but forgetting it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the switch Try using the out of band management port before resetting the switch The default IP address is 192 168 0 1 4 7 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others out of the switch you can try using out of band management If you still cannot correct the situation or forgot the password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file 4 7 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 T
211. ing traffic ports as the CPU 0 seven 7 eight 8 and nine 9 ras config vlan type port based ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface egress set 0 7 9 qos priority Syntax qos priority 0 7 where 0 7 gt Sets the quality of service priority for a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the IEEE 802 1p quality of service priority as four 4 ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface qos priority 4 294 Chapter 37 Interface Commands ES 3124 User s Guide 37 2 12 name Syntax name lt port name string gt where lt port name string gt Sets a name for your port interface s An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration e Set a name for the ports ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface name Test 37 2 13 speed duplex Syntax speed duplex auto 10 half 10 full 100 half 100 full 1000 full where lt auto 10 half 10 Sets the duplex mode half or full and speed 10 100 or 1000 FULL LOO Bale 100s Mbps of the connection on the port Selecting auto auto Se es negotiation makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five
212. ingle location 36 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 2 Bridging Application N Internet gt um moo Sales e e e Ys 1 4 3 High Performance Switched Example The switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Application 1 4 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples This section shows a workgroup and a shared server example using 802 1Q tagged VLANs Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 37 ES 3124 User s Guide A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic fir
213. ion You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Address Address Prefix Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Address Address Prefix Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Chapter 18 Classifier 149 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 41 Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configu
214. ions i aaa 234 24 5 Changing Uie Password Lula 235 246 Privilege Levels cn par ira ri 235 A A aa 236 CRESCI GID RO RR I I O O TITO 237 34 8 1 Dist ol Available Commande Load 238 34 9 Using Command HIStory assiali da 239 24 10 Saving Your Config Hellgl isuacc cor cesa secu t ienien 239 EE UM emesuscrusq i e ai 239 SALSA y eSI qr RO RR eine 240 4 11 Command SUMMA ario a 240 A a aa a a a a a 240 ad A 241 34 11 3 General Configuration Mode sit 246 34 11 4 interface port channel Commands sss 259 34 115 canhig vlan Commands cn 263 WE TLE ME Comilebtle uo sco RR E tuus 264 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands eese 267 Leni cip 267 CRA CERO O TL OTI UE 267 35 2 1 show system information ccccsceccceeeeeceeeeeeseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeceeeenseees 267 nde ETE e 268 Boe c II 268 5 2 Eua MONACO Meet D 268 16 Table of Contents ES 3124 User s Guide 23 2 9 SHOW mac adress SINE scri EE PERLE PR EE roads 269 cx po M c 270 AME PA e o een ED A A NaRa 270 22 0 Copy PON ADI lee 271 35 6 Configuration File Mainta m 272 35 6 1 Using a Different Configuration File uiiiiii iii 272 35 6 2 Resetting to the Factory Default iii 273 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 275 30 1 Enabling IGMP SiO
215. isplays the current temperature measured at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown 72 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3124 User s Gui de Table 8 System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power sup
216. it VLANs groups beyond the local switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process VLAN Administrative Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Control Registration Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the Forbidden specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted 86 Chapter 8 VLAN ES 3124 User s Guide Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology continued VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged Type incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 8 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to
217. l continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the Rate incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control
218. l Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 65 Policy Summary Table Index Active Name Classifier s Delete 1 Yes Test Example D Delete Cancel 156 Chapter 19 Policy Rule ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this policy This is for identification purposes only Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 19 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of band traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier
219. ld to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to save your static route to the the switch s run time memory The switch discards this route if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only Destination This field displays the IP ne
220. le describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 22 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications Multicast and the Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 22 1 on page 169 for more information on multicasting 170 Chapter 22 Multicast ES 3124 User s Guide Multicast Setting 6 Multicast Setting ng Multicast Status IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Host Timeout pe DOT Leave Timeout E 802 1p Priority No Change y IGMP Filtering Active O Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group Flooding C Drop Port immed Leave Group Limited Max Group Num IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Querier Mode D O m Deteuit Auto 1 O 0 fo Default Auto 2 O O fo Deteuit y Auto y 3 O O fo Default y Auto 4 O o o Default Auto sr 6 h esa ex Ca r oi Detaut Aic s 7 O O fo Default Auto 8 a r NN Defau z Auto y 9 O D o Default y Auto y 10 r O fo Default Auto 11 r r NN Default Auto 12 O O NN Default Auto ji r r E Dersu s uo E 14 O E f Default y Auto 15 O rH RN Default Auto 16 n a
221. lears the interface status of the 13 number specified port s show ip Displays IP related information 13 arp Displays the ARP table 13 tcp Displays TCP related information 13 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 241 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 83 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE udp Displays UDP related information 13 route Displays IP routing information 13 route static Displays IP static route 13 information hardware monitor Displays current hardware monitor 13 C F information with the specified temperature unit Celsius C or Fahrenheit F system Displays general system 13 information information vlanlq gvrp Displays GVRP settings 13 port isolation Displays port isolation settings 13 spanning tree config Displays Spanning Tree Protocol 13 STP settings mrstp Displays the STP settings for the 13 treeIndex specific tree mac address table Displays MAC address table 13 all You can sort by MAC address VID mac vid port gt or port address table Displays static MAC address table 13 static address table Displays the number of static MAC 13 count address tables lacp Displays LACP Link Aggregation 13 Control Protocol settings trunk Displays link aggregation 13 information radius server Displays RADIUS server settings 13 port access
222. lect an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 29 Syslog 217 ES 3124 User s Guide 218 Chapter 29 Syslog ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 30 Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 30 1 Cluster Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 74 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Chapter 30 Cluster Management 219 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 107 Clustering Application Example 30 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager 220 Chapter 30 Cluster Management ES 3124 User s Guide F
223. les a static MAC address 13 port filtering rule mirror Enables port mirroring 13 port lt port num gt Sets the monitor port the port to 13 which traffic is copied for analysis lacp Enables Link Aggregation Control 13 Protocol LACP system priority 1 655352 Sets the priority of an active port 13 using LACP trunk lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Activates a trunk group 13 T6 gt lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Enables LACP for a trunk group 13 T6 gt lacp Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 251 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Adds a port s to the specified 13 T6 gt interface trunk group lt port list gt interface lt port Defines the port number and 13 list gt timeout LACP timeout period lt lacp timeout gt cluster lt vlan id gt Sets the cluster management 13 VLAN ID name lt cluster Configures a name to identify the 13 name gt cluster manager member mac Sets the cluster member switch s 13 address hardware MAC address and password password lt password str gt rcommand mac Logs into a cluster member 13 address Switch 252 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE classifier name packet format lt 802 3untag 802 3tag Ethe
224. lete Delete Cancel Chapter 22 Multicast 177 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 55 MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port
225. lets O Disable y O Prompt b Leave fukhanticstian Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Y Reset coca 40 2 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 5 Click OK to close the window Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 313 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 123 Security Settings Java Security Settings Ax Settings O Disable 9 Enable 21 Font download O Disable 9 Enable N O Prompt 3 Microsoft VM E Java permissions O Custom O Disab aua 9 High safety O Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium y Reset ce 40 2 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window 314 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 124 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 29 Java Sun EEE O IRE 3 Microsoft VM
226. lick Advanced Applications Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 43 Static MAC Forwarding D Static MAC Forwarding nd Active 1 MAC Address I B M OB CK B A VID gi Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Delete Delete Cancel Chapter 9 Static MAC Forwarding 103 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Apply to save your rule to the the switch s run time memory The switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to
227. llowing table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing
228. llows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN Chapter 22 Multicast 175 ES 3124 User s Guide 22 5 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the switch to leave the multicast group The switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case a DSL port on the switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding dest
229. log out This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so as you don t lock out other switch administrators Figure 21 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 9 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen 60 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 5 Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Configure the switch IP management address 5 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANS confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 10 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN N Internet A Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 61 ES 3124 User s Guide 1 Click Advanced Application and VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link VLAN Port Setting xx The Number of VLAN 2 Status Elapsed Time Static 0 34 52 Static 0 34 52 Previous Next Change
230. ltering rule called filter Drop packets coming from and going to MAC address 00 12 00 12 00 12 on VLAN ras config mac filter name filter 1 ras config mac filter name filter 1 mac 00 12 00 12 00 12 vlan 1 drop both 36 8 Enabling Trunking To create and enable a trunk enter trunk followed by the ports which you want to group and press ENTER Syntax trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 interface lt port list gt trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 lacp where T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Enables the trunk T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Places ports in the trunk interface lt port list gt lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt lacp Enables LACP in the trunk An example is shown next Create trunk 1 on the switch 284 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Place ports 5 10 in trunk 1 Enable dynamic link aggregation LACP on trunk 1 ras config trunk tl ras config trunk tl interface 5 10 ras config trunk tl lacp 36 9 Enabling Port Authentication To enable a port authentication you need to specify your RADIUS server details and select the ports which require external authentication You can set up multiple RADIUS servers and specify how the switch will process authentication requests 36 9 1 RADIUS Server Settings Configuring multiple RADIUS servers is only available via the command interpreter mode Use th
231. m and system status Performance monitoring Line speed Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events Throughput monitoring CMP packet transmission Port mirroring and aggregation Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP snooping Firmware upgrade and download through FTP TFTP Login authorization and security levels read only and read write Self diagnostics FLASH memory Network Management CLI through console port and telnet Web based management Clustering up to 24 switches can be manage by one IP SNMP RMON groups history statistics alarms and events MIB RFC1213 MIB II RFC1493 Bridge MIB RFC1643 Ethernet MIB RFC1757 Four groups of RMON RFC2011 IP MIB RFC2012 TCP MIB RFC2013 UDP MIB RFC2674 Bridge MIB extension for IEEE 802 1Q Table 93 Physical and Environmental Specifications LEDs Per switch PWR SYS ALM BPS Per Ethernet port LNK ACT FDX Dimension 438 mm W x 270 mm D x 44 45 mm H Standard 19 rack mountable Weight 4 2Kg Temperature Operating 0 C 45 C Storage 10 C 70 C Humidity 10 90 non condensing Power Supply Overload protection 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 1 5A Max 318 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 93 Physical and Environmental Specifications continued Safety ANS UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A Appendix A Product Sp
232. mac lt mac addr gt Disables the specified MAC filter 13 vlan vlan id rule mirror port Disables port mirroring on the 13 switch lacp Disables the link aggregation 13 control protocol dynamic trunking on the switch trunk lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T Disables the specified trunk 13 5 T6 group lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T Disables LACP in the specified 13 5 T6 lacp trunk group lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T Removes ports from the specified 13 5 T6 trunk group interface lt port list gt bcp transparency Disables Bridge Control Protocol 13 BCP transparency storm control Disables broadcast storm control 13 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 247 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE bandwidth Disable bandwidth control on the 13 control Switch vlanlg gvrp Disables GVRP on the switch 13 port isolation Disables port isolation 13 spanning tree Disables STP 13 lt port list gt Disables STP on listed ports 13 mrstp lt treeIndex gt Disables the specified STP 13 configuration tree 1 6 mrstp interface Disables the STP assignment 13 lt port list gt from the specified port s timesync Disables timeserver settings 13 radius server index Disables the use of authentication 13 from the specified RADIUS server port access Disables port authentication on 13 authentica
233. mand Summary User Mode eese 240 Table 83 Command Summary Enable Mode eese 241 Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode sss 246 Table 85 interface port channel Commands _ sse 259 Table 86 Command Summary config vlan Commands sees 263 IE r4 ue cu M M 264 Table 88 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch 307 Table 89 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch 307 Table 90 Troubleshooting the Password usce oe rnt a ane nit bn ii 315 Table 91 General Product Specifications i 317 Table 92 Management Specifications iios recae 318 Table 93 Physical and Environmental Specifications rennene 318 Table 94 Classes of IP Addresses li 322 Table 95 Allowed IP Address Range By Class i 322 Tons go Natura MASKS liceo 323 Table 97 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation _ 323 Table 96 Two Subnels Exe Lola anb o ERE rta 1H aaa 324 Tabs SS A pios A s Ere N O AO ET paa ORE RR Pea bM AEN 324 Table 100 Ie scr M 325 Tables TOT SUGNA selle alii 325 Table We SUBNET Locale iaia arri 326 Table 103 SUBNET S siones i rai 326 A O iaia 326 Table 105 Eigh SUDBETS an 327 Table 108 Class C Subnet Planning lla 327 Table 107 Class B Subnet Planning iii iii iii a 328 List of Tables 27 ES 3124 User s Guide 28 List of Tables ES 3124 User s Guide
234. merics 10 1000 Ethernet ports 45 802 1P priority 83 A access control limitation 199 login account 202 remote management 211 service port 210 SNMP 200 accounts and modes 236 address learning MAC 95 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 229 231 232 administrator password 203 aggregation ID 133 aggregator ID 133 aging time 77 alternative subnet mask notation 323 applications 35 backbone 36 bridging 36 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 37 switched workgroup 37 ARP how it works 229 viewing 229 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 229 automatic VLAN registration 86 B back up configuration file 194 Index basic setting 71 BPDUS Bridge Protocol Data Units 108 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 108 C certifications 2 viewing 2 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 85 changing password 56 CLI syntax conventions 234 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 33 219 and switch passwords 225 cluster manager 219 224 cluster member 219 225 cluster member firmware upgrade 222 network example 219 setup 223 specification 219 status 220 Switch models 219 VID 224 web configurator 221 cluster manager 219 cluster member 219 Command Line Interface accessing 233 introduction 233 Command Line Interface CLI 233 commands 233 accessing 233 and configuration file 239 and interfaces 259 and multicasting 264 and passwords 235 configuration mode details 246 configure tagged VLAN example 297 enable mode details 241 exit
235. mmands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE storm Enables broadcast storm control 13 control on the switch bandwidth Enables bandwidth control 13 control mac aging lt 10 3000 gt Sets learned MAC aging time 13 time snmp get community Sets the get community 13 server property set community Sets the set community 13 property trap community Sets the trap community 13 property trap destination Sets the IP addresses of up to 13 ip four stations to send your SNMP traps to contact system Sets the geographic location and 13 contact gt the name of the person in charge location of this switch lt system location gt logins username lt name gt Configures a default read only 14 password lt pwd gt account username lt name gt privilege lt 0 Assigns a privilege level to user 14 14 accounts service icmp Allows ICMP access for services 13 control such as Ping snmp Allows SNMP management 13 http socket Allows HTTP access on the 13 number specified service port and defines timeout the timeout period telnet socket Allows Telnet access on the 13 number specified service port ftp lt socket Allows FTP access on the 13 number specified service port ssh socket Allows SSH access on the 13 number specified
236. ms supports it See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support For other operating systems see its documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software Chapter 16 Port Authentication 137 ES 3124 User s Guide Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure a VSA The following table describes the VSAs supported on the switch Table 36 Supported VSA FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Assignment Vendor Id 890 ZyXEL Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate decimal Egress Bandwidth Assignment Vendor Id 890 ZyXEL Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate decimal Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 ZyXEL Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the switch uses first for user authentication 16 1 1 2 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server to assign a port on the switch to a VLAN fixed untagged This will also set the port s VID Refer to RFC 3580
237. n Queuing Method in the navigation panel 160 Chapter 20 Queuing Method ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 67 Queuing Method 161 GE Port SPQ Enable CA AAA URRA ARA ARA lo ll el el lll ol E AAA AAA AAA G AAA AAA AAA CA ee esd ed ey lol lod lel ol ll ol le a a la a WENRRERRRRRRERRRRRRERRRRRRRERRE E RAE Di i Mi mi o o me fmt oie CN Mist iim 0 f o N Preso Ike eO Wc lin 308 100 Pei 05 We2 wl ge we Low foe i0ye o Uw IN Gad GIGI CEN FIN POCO Dene Wa C None y i Apply Cancel FE Port SPQ Enable spa C WFQ C WRR Method Port Chapter 20 Queuing Method ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Scheduling or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Scheduling is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight th
238. nds an authentication request through the switch to the RADIUS server The switch will forward the request to the first RADIUS server If there is no response within the timeout period the request times out The client sends an authentication request again and the switch forwards the request to the second RADIUS server See Section 36 9 2 on page 286 for an example 36 9 2 Port Authentication Settings Use the port access authenticator command to configure port security on the switch Syntax port access authenticator port access authenticator port access authenticator port access authenticator lt port list gt lt port list gt reauthenticate lt port list gt reauth period lt reauth period gt where port access authenticator port access authenticator lt port list gt reauthenticate reauth period reauth period Enables port authentication on the switch Specifes which ports require authentication Enables reauthentication on the port Specifies how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port 286 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide An example is shown next e Specify RADIUS server 1 with IP address 10 10 10 1 port 1890 and the string secretKey as the password See Section 36 9 1 on page 285 for more information on RADIUS server commands Specify the timeout period of 30 seconds that the switch will wait
239. nfigurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save this part of the screen to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 30 Cluster Management 225 ES 3124 User s Guide 226 Chapter 30 Cluster Management ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 31 This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 31 1 MAC Table Overview MAC Table The MAC T
240. ng Sets the priority of the specified 13 priority 0 7 interface in VLAN stacking exit Exits from the interface port 13 channel command mode intrusion lock Enables intrusion lock on a port 13 and a port cannot be connected again after you disconnected the cable test Performs an interface loopback 13 test protocol based Creates a protocol based VLAN 13 vlan name with the specified parameters name thernet typ lt ethernet type gt vlan lt vid gt priority lt 0 7 gt inactive Disables the protocol based VLAN 13 262 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide 34 11 5 config vlan Commands Table 86 Command Summary config vlan Commands The following table lists the vlan commands in configuration mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE vlan 1 Creates a new VLAN group 13 4094 name name str Specifies a name for identification 13 purposes normal port Specifies the port s to dynamically 13 list join this VLAN group using GVRP fixed port Specifies the port s to be a 13 list permanent member of this VLAN group forbidden port Specifies the port s you want to 13 list prohibit from joining this VLAN group untagged port Specifies the port s you don t want 13 list to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID inactive Disables the specified VLAN 13 help Displays a list of a
241. ng Tree Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured 118 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 12 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth 12 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application and then Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control 119 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 51 Bandwidth Control
242. ng to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 100 Mbps Off The port is not connected at 100 Mbps or to an Ethernet device 50 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 4 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the switch for example the default for the management port is 192 168 0 1 and for the switch port is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 15 Web Configurator Login Enter Network Password 2 x D gt Please type y
243. nk You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops Chapter 15 Link Aggreg
244. o Live TTL period Specifies the time period to wait Specifies how many tries the switch performs the traceroute function This command displays information about the route to an Ethernet device The following example displays route information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 ras gt traceroute 192 traceroute to 192 16 1 192 168 1 100 1 traceroute done ras gt 168 1 100 8 1 100 30 hops max 40 byte packet O ms 10 ms 0 ms 35 5 Copy Port Attributes Use the copy running ports Syntax copy ru list gt copy ru list gt I control limit control method config command to copy attributes of one port to another port or nning config interface port channel port port nning config interface port channel port lt port active name speed duplex bpdu control flow intrusion lock vlanlq vlanlgq member bandwidth vlan stacking port security broadcast storm mirroring port access authenticator queuing igmp filtering spanning tree mrstp protocol based v1 lan port based vlan Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode C ommands 271 ES 3124 User s Guide where copy running config interface port channel port lt port list gt copy running config interface port channel from lt port gt to lt port list gt active An example is shown next Copies all of the possible attributes from one p
245. o check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled 308 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 118 Internet Options Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing C Block pop ups Internet Options PIS pug General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced 3 Click Apply to save this setting 40 2 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 309 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 119 Internet Options Internet Options f fx _ General Security P
246. o upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 1 1 on page 46 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal Click Transfer then Send File to display the following screen 58 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 18 Example Xmodem Upload sendfile eee location or click Browse to Folder C Product search for it Filename C Product config rom Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol Protocol 1K Xmodem Then click Send 7 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the switch Figure 19 Reload the Configuration file Via Console Port Bootbase Version V0 6 03 06 2006 09 21 13 RAM Size 32 Mbytes DRAM POST Testing 32768K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH Intel 32M ZyNOS Version 3 70 AID 0 b0 4 28 2006 17 27 36 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds
247. ode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide 36 3 Enabling STP Use the spanning tree or the mrstp commands to enable and configure STP on the switch The difference between the commands is that spanning tree only allows you to set up one spanning tree configuration and the mrstp command allows you to set up multiple ones Syntax spanning tree spanning tree spanning tree delay spanning tree spanning tree and mrstp mrstp mrstp delay mrstp mrstp mrstp mrstp where spanning tree mrstp lt treeIndex gt priority lt 0 61440 gt hello time lt 1 10 gt lt 4 30 gt priority lt 0 61440 gt hello time lt 1 10 gt maximum age lt 6 40 gt forward lt port list gt path cost lt 1 65535 gt lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt lt treeIndex gt lt cr gt lt treeIndex gt priority lt 0 61440 gt lt treeIndex gt hello time 1 10 maximum age 6 40 forward 4 30 interface interface interface interface lt port list gt cr lt port list gt path cost lt 1 65535 gt lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt lt port list gt treeIndex 1 2 Enables STP on the switch Enables a specific tree configuration Specifies the bridge priority for the switch The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric
248. ol 124 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number 5 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control 125 ES 3124 User s Guide 126 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 14 Mirroring
249. ollowing screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s Chapter 32 ARP Table 229 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 114 ARP Table 172 21 100 153 172 21 207 247 192 168 1 1 182 168 1 5 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 100 A DEAD Index IP Address 1 172 21 0 2 2 172 21 3 16 3 172 21 3 18 4 172 21 3 40 5 172 21 3 66 6 172 21 3 90 7 172 21 3 91 8 172 21 3 95 9 172 21 3 120 10 172 21 3 138 11 172 21 4 99 12 172 21 10 11 t3 14 15 16 17 18 MAC Address 00 05 5d 04 30 f1 00 05 1c 15 08 71 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed 00 0c 76 07 41 0d 00 50 8d 47 73 4f 00 05 5df4 49 20 00 50 ba ad 56 7c 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 00 10 b5 ae 62 32 00 a0 c5 b2 52 26 00 0c 76 09 cf 88 08 00 20 ad f6 88 00 90 27 be a2 8c 00 0c 76 09 17 1a 00 a0 c5 3f 91 56 00 85 30 01 01 04 D0 a0 c5 5e df f8 00 85 a0 01 01 00 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic static dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the switch or static manu
250. on configuration 195 filtering 105 rules 105 filtering database MAC table 227 firmware upgrade 193 222 viewing 72 firmware version 72 flow control 83 back pressure 83 IEEE802 3x 83 frames tagged 94 untagged 94 front panel 45 FTP 195 file transfer procedure 196 restrictions over WAN 197 G GARP 86 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 86 garp status 298 GARP status command 298 GARP terminology 86 GARP timer 77 86 GBIC ports 47 GBIC ports 36 general setup 73 getting help 60 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 75 330 Index ES 3124 User s Guide GVRP 86 94 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 86 292 gvrp disable 299 gvrp enable 299 gvrp status 299 H hardware 35 connections console port 45 front panel 45 installation precautions 42 mounting brackets 42 overview 45 rack mounting 42 transceivers 47 48 hardware installation 41 help 60 in command interpreter 237 web configurator 60 history in command interpreter 239 HTTPS 206 certificates 206 implementation 206 public keys private keys 206 HTTPS example 207 IEEE 802 1p priority 77 IEEE 802 1x 137 activate 140 reauthentication 142 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 137 IGMP version 169 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol 169 IGMP filtering 169 profile 173 profiles 172 IGMP snooping 169 MVR 175 ingress port 101 installation freestanding 41 mounting brackets 42 precautions 42 rack mounting 42 rubber
251. onds 10 O On y soo seconds 11 O On y 3600 seconds 12 n On y 3600 seconds 13 O On y 600 seconds 14 O onz eoo seconds 15 O On y 3600 seconds 16 O On y 3600 seconds 17 O On x 3600 seconds 18 O On 3600 seconds 19 O On y 600 seconds 20 O On 3600 seconds 21 O On y 3600 seconds 22 O On y 600 seconds 23 O On y 600 seconds 24 O On y 3600 seconds 25 O On x 3600 seconds 26 O Onz 3600 seconds 27 O On 3600 seconds 28 O On y 3600 seconds Apply Cancel Chapter 16 Port Authentication 141 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Port Authentication 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number hi Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port
252. ontrol Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 7 Basic Setting 83 ES 3124 User s Guide 84 Chapter 7 Basic Setting ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 8 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANS can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches n
253. or her username and password to stay connected to a specified port reauth period Specifies how often a client has to 13 lt reauth re enter the username and period gt password to stay connected to the specified port s port Enables port security on the 13 security switch lt port list gt Enables the port security feature 13 on the specified port s learn inactive Disables MAC address learning 13 on the specified port s address limit Limits the number of dynamic 13 number MAC addresses that may be learned on a port MAC freeze Disables MAC address learning 13 and enables port security Note All previously learned dynamic MAC addresses are saved to the static MAC address table vlaniq gvrp Enables GVRP 13 port isolation Enables port isolation 13 garp join lt 100 65535 gt Configures GARP time settings 13 leave msec leaveall lt msec gt spanning Enables STP on the switch 13 tree priority lt 0 Sets the bridge priority of the 13 61440 gt switch Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 255 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE hello time 1 Sets Hello Time Maximum Age 13 10 maximum age and Forward Delay 6 40 forward delay 4 30 lt port list gt Enables STP on a specified port 13 lt port list gt Sets the STP path cost for a 1
254. or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be r
255. ort Authentication and Security For security the switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch VLAN Stacking Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Cluster Management Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another using same cluster management implementation Maintenance and Management Features Access
256. ort to another port or ports Copies only the specified port attributes from one port to another port or ports Copy all attributes of port 1 to port 2 Copy selected attributes active bandwidth limit and STP settings to ports 5 10 limit spanning tree ras copy running config interface port channel 1 2 ras copy running config interface port channel 1 5 10 active bandwidth 35 6 Configuration File Maintenance The following sections shows how to manage the configuration files 35 6 1 Using a Different Configuration File You can store up to two configuration files on the switch Only one configuration file is used at a time By default the switch uses the first configuration file with an index number of 1 You can set the switch to use a different configuration file There are two ways in which you can set the switch to use a different configuration file restart the switch cold reboot and restart the system warm reboot Use the boot config command to restart the switch and use a different configuration file if specified The following example restarts the switch to use the second configuration file rast boot config 2 Use the reload config command to restart the system and use a different configuration file if specified The following example restarts the system to use the second configuration file rast reload config 2 272 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands ES
257. oses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 22 Multicast 179 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 56 MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 22 7 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 17 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic Figure 76 MVR Configuration Example s ron i 1 News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Multicast VID 200 movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 gt w fE To configure the MVR settings on the switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports 180 Chapter 22 Multic
258. otocol Status a Rapid Spanning ree Protocol Status Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Running Time Since Last Change 0 00 11 Configuration 8000 0013496ad187 Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 0013496ad187 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to configure RSTP settings Refer to Section 11 3 on page 110 Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 113 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 26 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay
259. ou can cap the maximum incoming bandwidth Control allowed on specified port s Broadcast Storm Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure RADIUS Remote Authentication Authentication Dial In User Service a protocol for user authentication that allows you to use an external server to validate an unlimited number of users Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate maximum port security through the use of configured static MAC addresses Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure classifiers Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure policy rules Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure strictly priority or weighted fair scheduling with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast features and create multi
260. ou want to allow to access the switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 27 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen Chapter 27 Access Control 211 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 103 Access Control Remote Management Secured Client Entry Active 1 Iv 2 O 3 O 4 O Setup Start Address End Address Telnet FIP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS
261. our user name and password Site 192 168 0 10 Realm ES 3124 at Thu Jan 1 00 12 11 1970 User Name Password Save this password in your password list Cancel Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 51 ES 3124 User s Guide 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 16 Web Configurator Home Screen Status ZyXEL B Save Status E Logouk E Help MENU Basic Setting Port Status J a Advanced Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Ix KB s Rx KB s Up Time IP Application Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 I Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 A Down STOP Disabled 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00
262. ource port s 13 lt port list gt An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN no receiver port Disables the receiver port s 13 lt port list gt An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN no tagged lt port Sets the port s to untag VLAN 13 list gt tags no inactive Enables MVR 13 no group Disables all MVR group settings 13 no group lt name Disables the specified MVR group 13 str gt setting Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 265 ES 3124 User s Guide 266 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 35 User and Enable Mode Commands This chapter describes some commands which you can perform in the User and Enable modes 35 1 Overview The following command examples show how you can use User and Enable modes to diagnose and manage your switch 35 2 show Commands These are the commonly used show commands 35 2 1 show system information Syntax show system information This command shows the general system information such as the firmware version and system up time An example is shown next ras show system info System Name ES 3124 System Contact System Location E Ethernet Address 00 13 49 6a d1 87 ZyNOS F W Version 3 70 TP 0 b0 4 28 2006 RomRasSize 2483368 System up Time 3 3 42 28 145eld ticks Bootbase Version VO 6 01 14 2005 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode
263. ow to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal value Refer to Table 43 on page 150 for information Source MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Protocol Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer to Table 44 on page 151 for more informat
264. password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm T R G E IE e Aa mE EM LTA di TT STE Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Access Control Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see Chapter 34 on page 233 User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Chapter 27 Access Control 203 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 67 Access Control Logins continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory
265. ply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the minimum voltage at which the switch should work Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed 7 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 7 Basic Setting 73 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 28 General Setup Xxcncckbn NEN System Name Location Contact Person s Name Login Precedence Es 31 24 Local Only Use Time Server when Bootup None y 0 0 0 Time Server IP Address D Current Time New Time hh mm ss So So of of of Ss SJ f eji c Current Date 01 E o1 New Date yyyy mm dd T o i o Time Zone UTC ie It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name
266. ppareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Certifications ES 3124 User s Guide 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page Certifications 3 ES 3124 User s Guide Safety Warnings For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the r
267. precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the switch Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the switch 4 You may now mount the switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack 42 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack n D D D D pm p D D 0 o D S S o i JL nu wok alp y O S O H D D D D 0 O o O O o D D apr EIS 0S 00 O OO O Jooooooooog 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 43 ES 3124 User s Guide
268. pter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 26 1 The Maintenance Screen Click Management Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 84 Maintenance _ Maintenance g Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuration Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuration Load Factory Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Default Chapter 26 Maintenance 191 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 61 Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Configuration switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboo
269. quest response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 64 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations 200 Chapter 27 Access Control ES 3124 User s Guide Table 64 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 27 3 1 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 27 3 2 SNMP Traps The switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs SNMP traps supported are outlined in the following table Table 65 SNMP Traps
270. r R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 4 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value MAC address Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 22 STP Path Costs LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE gt Map DAE ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 107 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 22 STP Path Costs LINK SPEED
271. r 3 is usually a good number name lt name gt Specifies a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes inactive Deactivates a static route An example is shown next Create a static route with the destination IP address of 172 21 1 104 subnet mask of 255 255 0 0 and the gateway IP address of 192 168 1 2 e Assigns a metric value of 2 to the static route e Assigns the name routel to the static route ras config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 ras config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 metric 2 ras config ip route 172 21 1 104 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 name routel 36 7 Enabling MAC Filtering You can create a filter to drop packets based on the MAC address of the source or the destination Syntax mac filter name name mac lt mac addr gt vlan vlan id drop lt src dst both Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 283 ES 3124 User s Guide where name name Names the filtering rule mac lt mac addr gt Specifies the MAC address you want to filter vlan vlan id Specifies which VLAN this rule applies to drop lt src dst both gt Selects the behavior of the rule src drop packets coming from the specified MAC address dst drop packets going to the specified MAC address both drop packets coming from or going to the specified MAC address An example is shown next e Create a fi
272. r ports port channel port lt port lista Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 245 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 83 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE cable lt port list gt Performs a basic connectivity test 13 diagnosti on the ports Displays Ok if cs connector is inserted in the port Open if no connector is inserted in the port or Unknown if this test cannot determine the status ping ip host name Sends Ping request to an Ethernet 13 device vlan vlan Sends Ping request to an Ethernet 13 id device in the specified VLAN s help Displays command help 13 information tracerout lt ip host name gt Determines the path a packet 13 e in band out of takes to a device band vlan vlan id gt tt1 lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries 1 10 help Displays command help 13 information ssh lt 1 2 gt Connects to an SSH server with 13 lt user dest ip gt the specified SSH version command lt gt Connects to an SSH server with 13 the specified SSH version and addition commands to be executed on the server 34 11 3 General Configuration Mode The following table lists the commands in Configuration or Config mode Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE help Displays help information 13 logout Exits from the CLI 13
273. r s Guide Figure 110 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C i gt ftp 19 Connected User 192 331 Enter Password ftp gt ls 200 Port c W Ww w rw rw rw W Ww w rw rw rw 226 File s ftp bin 200 Type I 200 Port c 226 File r ftp 2Z l0698 1 L to 192 168 1 1 220 ES 3124 FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 168 0 1 none admin PASS command 230 Logged in ommand okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST 1 owner group l owner group l owner group 1 owner group ent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec OK ftp put 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 ommand okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 eceived OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 76 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3601t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmwar
274. ration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule Figure 62 Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 CD Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 43 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 150 Chapter 18 Classifier ES 3124 User s Guide Table 43 Common Ethernet
275. rd a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain Chapter 8 VLAN 85 ES 3124 User s Guide 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 8 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 8 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 8 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to perm
276. rding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number E Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port b
277. refer to Section 18 4 on page 151 Chapter 19 Policy Rule 157 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 66 Policy Example _ 6 Policy Active Vv Name Test Classifier s General Metering VLAN ID fi Bandwidth Egress Port fi mu NN Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port Tag C Untag Priority 0 7 DSCP p TOS 0 7 Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Sendthe packetto priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Setthe packet s TOS field Action C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packet to the mirror port Send the packet to the egress port Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable Iv Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set OutDrop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear 158 Chapter 19 Policy Rule ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 20 Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance de
278. ring Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Unknown Specify the action to perform when the switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group Multicast addresses 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for the local scope For examples 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts in this subnet 224 0 0 2 is for all multicast routers in this subnet etc A router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range See the IANA web site for more information Specify the action to perform when the switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Group Limited Select this option to limit t
279. ring gt Sets a name for the port s Enter a descriptive name up to nine printable ASCII characters vlan trunking Enables VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch flow control Enables interface flow control Flow control regulates transmissions to match the bandwidth of the receiving port bandwidth limit Enables ingress pir cir and egress limits on the port s ELE Enables the guaranteed bandwidth limits for incoming traffic on the port s cir lt Kbps gt Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port s pir Enables bandwidth limits allowed for incoming traffic on the port s pir lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port s egress Enables bandwidth limits allowed for outgoing traffic on the port s egress lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic on the port s broadcast limit Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch lt pkt s gt Sets how many broadcast packets the interface receives per second 260 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 85 interface port channel Commands continued
280. rivacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker S Prevent most pop up windows from appearing 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites 310 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 120 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting 40 2 1 2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that Java
281. rllunta g Etherlltag gt priority lt 0 7 gt vlan lt vlan id gt ethernet typ lt ether num ip ipx arp r arplappletalk de cnet sna netbios dlc Source mac src mac addr gt source port lt port num gt destination mac lt dest mac addr gt dscp lt 0 63 gt ip protocol lt protocol num tcp udp icmp legplospf rsvpli gmpligplpim ipse c establish only Source ip lt src ip addr gt mask bits lt mask bits gt source socket lt socket num gt destination ip lt dest ip addr gt mask bits lt mask bits gt destination socket lt socket num inactive Configures a classifier A 13 classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 253 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE policy name classifier lt classifier listo vlan lt vlan id gt egress port lt port num gt priority lt 0 7 gt dscp lt 0 63 gt tos lt 0 7 gt bandwidth lt bandwidth gt outgoing packet format tagged untagged gt out of profile dscp 0 63 forward action drop forward queue action lt prio set prio
282. ro net Explorer System Up Time Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port Copyright 199 CA nme ve Status El Logout B Help Port Link State Lace TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s RxKB s Up Time 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 XEL Communications Corp 7 Chapter 27 Access Control 209 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 101 Login Screen Netscape web Configurator Netscape 2 Ele Edt Mew Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help PO nud p mi 3 re ren C search Download 4 Customize IC N save Mi Status El Logout E Help System Up Time 3 01 53 Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s RxKB s Up Time 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0
283. rrent SSH session s 13 https Displays the HTTPS information 13 session Displays current HTTPS 13 session s certificate Displays the HTTPS certificates 13 key lt rsa dsa gt Displays the HTTPS key 13 timeout Displays the HTTPS session 13 timeout multi login Displays multi login information 13 plt Displays Packet Loop Test PLT 13 mac aging time Displays MAC learning aging time 13 cluster Displays cluster management 13 status candidates Displays cluster candidate 13 information member Displays the MAC address of the 13 cluster member s member mac lt mac Displays the status of the cluster 13 addr member s members config Displays the configuration of the 13 cluster member s igmp filtering Displays IGMP filter profile 13 profile settings igmp snooping Displays IGMP snooping settings 13 multicast Displays multicast settings 13 mvr Displays all MVR Multicast VLAN 13 Registration settings lt vlan id gt Displays specified MVR 13 information diffserv Displays DiffServ settings on the 13 switch igmp Removes all IGMP information 13 flush 244 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 83 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE kick tcp lt Session ID gt Resets a TCP connection Use the 13 show ip tcp command to get the Session ID mac flush Clears the MAC addres
284. rresponding sub commands ras help Commands available help logout exit history enable show ip cr show hardware monitor C F show system information ping lt ip host name gt cr ping ip host name vlan lt vlan id gt ping help traceroute ip host name cr traceroute ip host name vlan lt vlan id gt traceroute help ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt lt cr gt ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt command lt gt ras gt Enter to display a list of commands you can use ras enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC help Description of the interactive help system history Show a list of previously run commands logout Exit from the EXEC ping Exec ping show Show system information ssh SSH client traceroute Exec traceroute ras Enter command help to display detailed sub commands and parameters ras ping help Commands available ping lt ip host name gt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size lt 0 1472 gt Pate gt ras gt 238 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Enter command to display detailed help information about the sub commands and parameters ras gt ping lt ip host name gt destination ip address help Description of ping help ras gt 34 9 Using Command History The switch keeps
285. rts are tagged and which are untagged ras show vlan The Number of VLAN 3 Idx VID Status Elap Time TagCtl 1 1 Static 0 12 13 Untagged 1 28 Tagged E 1 100 Static 0 00 17 Untagged Tagged 1 24 1 200 Static 0 00 07 Untagged 1 12 Tagged 13 28 Chapter 38 IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLAN Commands 303 ES 3124 User s Guide 304 Chapter 38 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 39 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands This chapter shows you how to use Multicast VLAN Registration mvr commands 39 1 Overview Use the mvr commands in the configuration mode to create and configure multicast VLANSs Note If you want to enable IGMP snooping see Section 36 1 on page 275 39 2 Create Multicast VLAN Use the following commands in the config mvr mode to configure a multicast VLAN group Syntax mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr mvr ip mvr where vlan id source port lt port list gt receiver port lt port list gt name lt name str gt mode dynamic compati ble vl vl vl vl vl vl vl lt v vl an id an id an id an id an id an id an id lan id gt an id Source port lt port list gt receiver port port list inactive mode dynamic compatible name name str tagged port list group lt name str gt start address ip end address exit The VLAN ID 1
286. rvice Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the switch will disconnect the Telnet session immediately Chapter 26 Maintenance 197 ES 3124 User s Guide 198 Chapter 26 Maintenance ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 27 Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the switch 27 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share four sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 63 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP sessions One session Share up to four One session Up to five accounts No limit A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See Section 34 11 2 on page 241 for more information on disabling multi login 27 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 90 Access Control Access Control SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here Chapter 27 Access Control 199 ES 3124 User s Guide 27 3 About S
287. s OVERVIEW seria 153 TIMOR AN ii alii 153 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop BehaviOr rr 153 192 Configudag Policy Rules ode siete eei dd D iaia 154 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration 156 194 Policy Example f 157 Chapter 20 elg e X 159 20 1 Queuing Method ONVODVIB ies raria zn a nk kde nd 159 201 1 Strigty PID A M 159 20 1 2 Welghted Fair Scheduling iaia 159 20 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR eeessss 160 20 2 Configuring QUEUE M 160 Chapter 21 VLAN Sac iia de 163 21 1 VLAN Stacking IRE sii ni ira iii 163 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking EXAMplo scia 163 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Rolos uai eate aed i ar toS elia 164 AA Rca 164 23 1 Frame PORTAL cca 165 214 Contiguring VLAN Slacking ces ts a 166 Chapter 22 Mullicast c a 169 ZE MU RR clelia 169 PANELS Tcu c AAA nsa EEN 169 22 ONP FONDO lla 169 Table of Contents 13 ES 3124 User s Guide CER IOMP OPIO lilla AA 169 25 uer eT 170 22 3 MUlicastaeting sir 170 22A IOMP Fim FONS scinni 173 22 NA ONON at 175 22 91 Typ s OF MYR Ports porre rei iii ii cei in 175 poder MUR tie Met 175 22 5 HOW MYR MESS lella 176 226 General MYR CORNQUESUDET A ida 176 22 7 MVR Group COMIT sica aa ai 179 42 7 1 MYR Configuration Example rca 180 Chapter 23
288. s is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the frame have already been transmitted Error Packet RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of frames received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 69 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of pack
289. s negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port 1s not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 23 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed 108 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol ES 3124 User s Guide Table 23 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEU s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only Figure 4
290. s obstruct the airflow of the fans 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector The switch supports external backup power supply BPS The backup power supply constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the switch in the event of a power failure Once the switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed 3 3 Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel Table2 Front Panel LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active Amber Blinking The system cannot get power from the backup power supply PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 49 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 2 Front Panel LEDs continued
291. s table 13 lt port num gt Removes all learned MAC address 13 on the specified port s erase running config Resets to the factory default 13 settings interface port Resets to the factory default 13 channel lt port settings on a per port basis and list gt optionally on a per feature bandwidth configuration basis limit baudrate lt 1 2 3 4 5 gt Changes the console port speed 13 Choices are 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 and 5 115200 boot config lt index gt Restarts the system with the 13 specified configuration file reload config lt index gt Restarts the system and use the 13 specified configuration file write memory Saves current configuration to the 13 configuration file the switch is currently using index Saves current configuration to the 13 specified configuration file on the Switch copy tftp flash ip Restores firmware via TFTP 13 lt remote file gt tftp config Restores configuration with the 13 lt index gt lt ip gt specified filename from the lt remote file gt specified TFTP server running config Backs up running configuration to 13 tftp ip the specified TFTP server with the remote file specified file name copy running Clones copies the attributes from 13 config interface the specified port to other ports port channel port lt port list copy running bandwidth Copies the specified attributes 13 config interface limit from one port to othe
292. sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile O Change the DSCP value action SetOut Drop Precedence FT Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Ada Cancel Clear 154 Chapter 19 Policy Rule ES 3124 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Policy LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Outgoing Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port packet Otherwise select Untag format for Egress port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to
293. seperated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports e 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus Application should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 232 Chapter 33 Configure Clone ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 34 Introducing Commands This chapter introduces commands and gives a summary of commands available 34 1 Overview In addition to the web configurator you can use commands to configure the switch Use commands for advanced switch diagnosis and troubleshooting If you have problems with your switch customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist them in troubleshooting Note See the web configurator parts of this User s Guide for background information on features configurable by the web configurator 34 2 Accessing the CLI You can use a
294. ser s Guide CHAPTER 40 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies 40 1 Problems Starting Up the Switch Table 88 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the LEDs Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on turn on when you turn on the switch If the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should contact your vendor 40 2 Problems Accessing the Switch Table 89 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot access the switch using Telnet Make sure the ports are properly connected You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled Telnet service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details cannot access the web configurator The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults in
295. st goes through a router For more information on VLANS refer to Chapter 8 on page 85 1 4 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling Figure 4 Tag based VLAN Application mcm m VLAN 2 a N A A ee e Sees eee m m m eee 1 4 4 2 VLAN Shared Server Example Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server as shown in the following example In this example only ports that need access to the server need belong to VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too 38 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example y lt z lt gt z N e d L a uU u Um m m m m m mo mo m mmmmmm mmm Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 39 ES 3124 User s Guide 40 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the switch is clean and dry 2 Set the switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of
296. t multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause frames TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission was inhibited by more than one oollision Excessive This is a count of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late Thi
297. t Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the switch System Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the switch 26 2 Load Factory Defaults Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults 1 In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Defaults to clear all switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 85 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer x A rebooting please close this session then reconnect later 3 In the web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default switch IP address 192 168 1 1 26 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration 192 Chapter 26 Maintenance
298. tact and location fields are optional Command refers to a command used in the command line interface CI command e The symbol means or e The entry cr in the command lines refers to carriage return Press ENTER or carriage return after a command to execute the command Use the up or down arrow key to scroll through the command history list You may enter a unique part of a command and press TAB to have the switch automatically display the full command For example if you enter config and press TAB the full command of configure automatically displays Each interface refers to an Ethernet port on the switch Commands configured after the interface command correspond to those ports e Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash 34 5 Changing the Password This command is used to change the password for Enable mode By default the same password is used to enter the command line interface CLI and Enable and Config modes of the CLI The password you change with this command is required to enter Enable and Config modes of the CLI Syntax password lt password gt where password password Specifies the new password up to 32 alphanumeric characters users have to type in to enter Enable and Config modes 34 6 Privilege Levels You can use a command whose privilege level is equal to or less than that of your login a
299. tes this is optional DHCP Relay Configuration To configure DHCP relay information and specify the DHCP server s click Advanced Application and DHCP Relay to display the screen as shown next Chapter 23 DHCP Relay 183 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 80 DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Active Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information Option 82 M ES 3124 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 DHCP Relay LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the switch add information slot number Information port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the switch to add the system name to the DHCP client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fiel
300. that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group Dynamic Select this check box to enable LACP for a trunk LACP Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 135 ES 3124 User s Guide 136 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation ES 3124 User s Guide CH
301. the host ID Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting 321 ES 3124 User s Guide The following table shows the network number and host ID arrangement for classes A B and C Table 94 Classes of IP Addresses IP ADDRESS OCTET 1 OCTET 2 OCTET 3 OCTET 4 Class A Network number Host ID Host ID Host ID Class B Network number Network number Host ID Host ID Class C Network number Network number Network number Host ID An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 for example Therefore to determine the total number of hosts allowed in a network deduct two as shown next A class C address 1 host octet 8 host bits can have 28 2 or 254 hosts A class B address 2 host octets 16 host bits can have 216 2 or 65534 hosts A class A address 3 host octets 24 host bits can have 274 2 hosts or approximately 16 million hosts IP Address Classes and Network ID The value of the first octet of an IP address determines the class of an address Class A addresses have a 0 in the leftmost bit Class B addresses have a 1 in the leftmost bit and a 0 in the next leftmost bit Class C addresses start with 1 1 0 in the first three leftmost bits Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 Class D addresses are used for multicasting which is used
302. this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 75 MVR Group Configuration A oxdggmmecnurmzcrn MVR Multicast VLAN ID 2 y Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 169 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 169 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or l
303. this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 254 0 means this feature is disabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 17 Port Security 145 ES 3124 User s Guide 146 Chapter 17 Port Security ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 18 Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the switch 18 1 About
304. tia 321 AA EA 329 Table of Contents 19 ES 3124 User s Guide 20 Table of Contents ES 3124 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Backbone ADICTO ii A i 36 Figure Bridgingi Application aussen pn nk Eee na nho ii 37 Figure 3 High Performance Switched Application eee 37 Figure 4 Tag based VLAN Application nnns 38 Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example 39 Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Fegt 1 cesis sere a 41 Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets__ 42 Figure 8 Mo nting the Switch on a Rack uoces iste E Hte a bern i ee Rr HER ERE EUER 43 ao c FREAD ee 45 Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenne nenne 47 Figure 11 installed Transceiver cuccia ai 48 Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example sees 48 Figure 19 Transceiver Removal Exemple iaia 48 Figure 14 Rear Panel e 49 Figure 15 Web Configurator LOGIN scort iaia si 51 Figure 16 Web Configurator Home Screen Status eese 52 Figure 17 Change Administrator Login Password 57 Figure 18 Example Xmodem Upload i 59 Figure 19 Reload the Configuration file Via Console Port _ 59 Figure 20 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port __ 60 Figure 21 Web Configurator Logout Screen aiar 60 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example
305. tion 8 5 on page 88 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 35 Static VLAN Details VEN Dear VID 2 VLAN Status Port Number 6 8 10 12 14 18 18 20 22 24 28 28 Elapsed Time Status 3 5 7 9 11 131 15 E A 2 23 20 27 0 01 22 Static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Static VLAN Details LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added using Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Chapter 8 VLAN 89 ES 3124 User s Guide 8 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the switch See Section 8 5 on page 88 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the scre
306. tion Commands 298 suat ARP SUS did 298 20 22 GARP TIRE aria 298 Ono OUR secco 299 o0 EA A ae Addo ede 299 29 2 5 Disahblg BP Lalla 299 20 Port VLAD CAMAS ri t tactis rep aa REIS vai d er exe AA 299 od T SUPR SIE BRR ERRE AT RS RR IR A 300 28 3 2 Set Acceptable Frame Type cri 300 36 3 3 Enable ar Disable Port GYRP Lacco alli lassi 300 38 3 4 Mode Statie VLAN ada 301 38 3 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example eene 301 38 3 4 2 Forwarding Process Exemple 1 ira iii 301 30 39 Delta VLAN ID ii 302 xi moz VLAN AA 302 EROR c y LAN a a io 303 305 NOW VLAN GOING EN 303 Chapter 39 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenee 305 ITER ERR UE D T 305 39 2 Create Multicast VLAN lbn 305 Chapter 40 TIOUBblEesHontiigi icniia en 307 40 1 Problems Starting Up the Sul si a 307 40 2 Problems Accessing the SWICK seisustest netanna ii 307 40 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 308 40 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers 308 202 1 2 ASCO iosa 311 20 2 1 2 Java Permissions usc ed od ek eos ec o c E RR d eda 313 40 3 Problems with the Password Lui era antra ad ida Hp na li 315 18 Table of Contents ES 3124 User s Guide Appendix A FFOAUCESPSCHCal0 NS carina 317 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting cccusisriotinionicianiznizionaiaianiaiia tizia iaia gaia na
307. tion of the binary BIN file and click upgrade button Maintenance File Path Browse Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Upgrade After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number 26 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 88 Restore Configuration Restore Configuration Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen below from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 26 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date 194 Chapter 26 Maintenance ES 3124 User s Gui
308. to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN 224 Chapter 30 Cluster Management ES 3124 User s Guide Table 77 Clustering Management Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The Switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web co
309. tor the switch lt port list gt Disables authentication on the 13 listed ports lt port list gt Disables the re authentication 13 reauthenticate mechanism on the listed port s port security Disables port security on the 13 switch lt port list gt Disables port security on the 13 specified ports lt port list gt Enables MAC address learning 13 learn inactive on the specified ports snmp server trap Disables sending of SNMP traps 13 destination to a station ip logins username Disables login access to the 14 name specified name service control telnet Disables telnet access to the 13 Switch ftp Disables FTP access to the 13 Switch http Disables web browser control to 13 the switch ssh Disables SSH Secure Shell 13 server access to the switch https Disables secure web browser 13 access to the switch icmp Disables ICMP access to the 13 Switch such as pinging and tracerouting 248 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Table 84 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE snmp Disables SNMP management 13 remote lt index gt Clears a secure client set entry 13 management from the list of secure clients lt index gt Disables a secure client set entry 13 service number from using the selected lt telnet remote management service s ftp http icmp snmp ssh
310. traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 21 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as circled in the switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 49 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Etype Data FCS Untagged Ethernet frame DA SA TPID Priority VID Len Etype Data FCS IEEE 802 1Q customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPID Priority VID TPID Priority VID Len Etype Data FCS Double tagged frame Table 50 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Etype Length and type of Ethernet frame SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 165 ES 3124 User s Guide 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications and then VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 69 VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking Active O e 0x8100 SEEN C Others
311. twork address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 186 Chapter 24 Static Route ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 25 DiffServ Code Point This chapter shows you how to set up Diffserv Code Point DSCP on each port and how to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802 1p values 25 1 DiffServ Overview DiffServ Code Point DSCP is a field used for packet classification on DiffServ networks The higher the value the higher the priority Lower priority packets may be dropped if the total traffic exceeds the capacity of the network 25 2 Enable DiffServ Click IP Application DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point 187 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 82 DiffServ Difisery DSCP Setting Active O Port Active viola e 8 A dk Go MWh hf AOS AOE MO NO Di od Se Se SS e 1 CO Oh me 00 ss E EN gt O OFS on mm Cid dii Didi Di Didi di Didi di di did oo M co Apply Cancel
312. ty Enter the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Trap Destination Enter the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 27 3 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 202 Chapter 27 Access Control ES 3124 User s Guide Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure switch settings Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen Figure 93 Access Control Logins acr Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your
313. u click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 7 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts
314. und Robin wrr fe spq Q0 07 Sets the switch to use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue You may want to configure weights for specific queues on the ports if you use WRR See the weight command example in Section 37 2 9 on page 293 An example is shown next Set the queueing method to SPQ ras config spq 36 6 Static Route Commands You can create and configure static routes on the switch by using the ip route command 282 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands ES 3124 User s Guide Syntax ip route lt ip gt lt mask gt lt next hop ip gt ip route lt ip gt lt mask gt lt next hop ip gt metric lt metric gt name lt name gt inactive where lt ip gt Specifies the network IP address of the final destination lt mask gt Specifies the subnet mask of this destination lt next hop ip gt Specifies the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch metric lt metric gt The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 o
315. unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 32 Port VLAN Trunking i N N Pa om VI v2 nan d m 8 4 Select the VLAN Type 1 Select a VLAN type in the Switch Setup screen Chapter 8 VLAN 87 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 33 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type a ENTE VLAN Type 80210 C PortBased 8 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sentto a VLAN group as normal depends on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID 8 5 1 Static VLAN Status
316. use 0 y Authentication O local use 0 y IP O local use 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 29 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display the Syslog Setup screen Click the Syslog Server Setup link to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers 216 Chapter 29 Syslog ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 106 Syslog Server Setup Server Address Log Level Index Active JEBCFENTECT Syslog Setup Active O 0 0 0 0 Level 0 y Add C
317. uses of these commands 36 4 1 Disable Commands Use the no command to disable features on the switch Syntax no spanning tree no mirror port Disables STP on the switch Disables port mirroring on the switch 36 4 2 Resetting Commands Use the no command to reset switch settings to their default values Syntax no https timeout Resets the https session timeout to default An example is shown next The session timeout is reset to 300 seconds ras config no https timeout Cache timeout 300 36 4 3 Re enable commands The no command can also be used to re enable features which have been disabled Syntax no ip route lt ip gt lt mask gt inactive Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 279 ES 3124 User s Guide where Xip mask inactive Re enables an ip route with the specified IP address and subnet mask An example is shown next Enable the IP route with the IP address of 192 168 11 1 and subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 This ip route must have already been created and made inactive prior to re enable command being applied ras config no ip route 192 168 11 1 255 255 255 0 inactive 36 4 4 Other Examples of no Commands In some cases the no command can disable a feature disable an option of a feature or disable a feature on a port by port basis 36 4 4 1 no trunk Syntax no trunk lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt no trunk lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 gt
318. vailable VLAN 13 commands no fixed port Sets fixed port s to normal port s 13 listo forbidden Sets forbidden port s to normal 13 lt port list gt port s untagged port Enables VLAN tagging for outgoing 13 list gt traffic on the specified port s inactive Enables the specified VLAN 13 ip address Sets the default in band interface 13 inband default to use a static IP address in this dhcp bootp VLAN The switch will use the default IP address of 0 0 0 0 if you do not configure a static IP address ip address ip Deletes the IP address and subnet 13 address mask mask from this VLAN ip address Deletes the default gateway from 13 default gateway this VLAN exit Leaves the VLAN configuration 13 mode ip address inband default Sets the dynamic in band IP 13 dhcp bootp address Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 263 ES 3124 User s Guide Table 86 Command Summary config vlan Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE inband default Releases the dynamic in band IP 13 dhcp bootp address release inband default Updates the dynamic in band IP 13 dhcp bootp address renew inband default Sets a static in band IP address 13 lt ip address gt and subnet mask lt mask gt lt ip address gt Sets the management IP address 13 lt mask gt and subnet mask of the switch in manageable the specified VLAN lt ip address
319. ware on your computer firmware bin to the switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 62 on page 195 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 196 Chapter 26 Maintenance ES 3124 User s Guide 26 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 26 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Se
320. wn Chapter 18 Classifier 147 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 61 Classifier oxdrcuutd Active O Name Packet Format AI VLAN gt cta 8L on Any rior v ch e Au Ethernet Type e Others Hex Layer 2 MAC Add NY ress _ C MAC pren Bo Any o o Destinat MAC Add A estination ress Bac LI BE M OE B DSCP ie ol I an y Establish Only IP Protocol C others Dec IP Address noon 0 0 0 0 Tm Address Prefix y S Source c Any Socket Numb ocket Number C i IP Address pavo a Address Prefix ERIS Destination Any Socket Number of Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Rule Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Format Ethernet Il tagged and Ethernet Il untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet Il encapsulation 148 Chapter 18 Classifier ES 3124 User s Guide Table 41 Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Layer 2 Specify the fields bel
321. xample port 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and port 4 5 10 11 belong to static VLAN 120 You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 10 and 11 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 10 and 11 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 38 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 8 7 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Advanced Applications Protocol Based VLAN in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Chapter 8 VLAN 95 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 39 Protocol Based VLAN EH Protocol Based VLAN d Vian Port Setting Active O Port Name c mmm Ethernet type c others Hex VID Priority o Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Deiete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based
322. y in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 17 Port Security 143 ES 3124 User s Guide Figure 60 Port Security z Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address 2 isd 1 m 2 NENNEN 2 r K o 3 K la 4 C 2 a 5 a 2 la B o 7 B l 7 o 1 fa 8 O 2 p 9 m 2 fo 10 m 2 Db 11 ri v lm 12 rn 2 p 13 a Ie la 14 a e fp Ss 15 r 7 fo 16 n 2 ei 17 2 fa 18 D K fo 19 D 2 20 O 1 fo 21 rn 7 la 22 n 7 E 23 r 2 NENNEN 24 2 fp 25 e NENNEN 26 r 2 lo 27 v o 28 r K fo Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable port security on the switch Port This field displays a port number 144 Chapter 17 Port Security ES 3124 User s Guide Table 40 Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on
323. y should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates 1s optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the switch s WS web server Figure 96 HTTPS Implementation WS 443 HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 206 Chapter 27 Access Control ES 3124 User s Guide 27 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the switch then in your browser enter https switch IP Address as the web site address where switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the switch you wish to access 27 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate 1f you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No th
324. y the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail Port without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch s run time memory The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Chapter 14 Mirroring 129 ES 3124 User s Guide 130 Chapter 14 Mirroring ES 3124 User s Guide CHAPTER 15 Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity li

ZyXEL ES-3124 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents